Conveyor

Technology

Conveyor Technology.
Linear Technology.
Modular Construction Kit for Factory Automation

2
 Profile Technology

» Components,
modules and solutions for
factory automation. «
Conveyor Technology
Maschinenbau Kitz, the parent company of
the mk Technology Group, was founded in
1966 in Troisdorf, near Bonn, Germany. mk is
one of the leading suppliers of components,
modules and systems for factory automation.

Our portfolio of profile technology includes

workstation set-ups, guarding and custom-
designed machine frames and platforms, in
addition to the aluminium profile system on
which they are based.

In the field of conveyor technology, mk offers

System Solutions an extensive range of standardised conveyor
types, supplemented with linear technology
for precision handling applications.

Furthermore, mk is on hand to assist its cus­

tomers with system solutions, from project
planning and design to the commissioning of
complete transfer systems.

Our services round off the product portfolio

and include repairs, maintenance and a spare
parts supply service.

With our deep production, sales and service

Services network consisting of subsidiaries, sales
partners and external service providers, we
guarantee our customers fast access to our
expert advice and outstanding products.

3
Overview of Sections

Information on
Conveyor Technology 1 Belt Conveyors 2 Modular Belt Conveyors 3

Benefits of mk Selecting a Belt Conveyor 20 Selecting a

Conveyor Technology 6 GUF-P MINI 22 Modular Belt Conveyor 118
Selecting a Conveyor Type 8 GUF-P 2045 32 MBF-P 2040 120
Selecting a Drive 12 GUF-P 2000 36 KFM-P 2040 124
QuickDesigner – The Conveyor GUF-P 2041 52 KMF-P 2040 130
Technology Configurator 16 GUF-P 2004 62 KFS-P 2040.86 136
KFG-P 2000 70 Modular Belts 142
KGF-P 2040 80 Application Examples 146
DGF-P 2001 84
Belts88
Cleats/Side Walls 92
Application Examples 96

Timing Belt Conveyors 4 Chain Conveyors 5 Flat Top Chain Conveyors 6

Selecting a Selecting a Chain Conveyor 184 SBF-P 2254 228

Timing Belt Conveyor 154 KTF-P 2010 186 SBF-EMMA236
ZRF-P 2040 156 SRF-P 2010 196 Application Examples 238
ZRF-P 2010 160 SRF-P 2012 206
Timing Belts 170 Chains214
Accessories172 Accessories216
Application Examples 176 Application Examples 220

4
 Conveyor Technology
Roller Conveyors 7 Rotary Tables 8 Accessories 9

Selecting a Roller Conveyor 246 DTZ-P 2040 274 Stands280

RBS-P 2065/2066 248 Application Examples 276 Side Rails 294
RBS-P 2255 252 Nuts300
RBT-P 2255 256 Electrical Components 302
RBM-P 2255 260 Other Accessories 304
Rollers264 Application Examples 306
Application Examples 266

Information on Linear Units Application Examples

Linear Technology 10 and Modules 11 of System Solutions 12

Benefits of Gliding Assemblies  320 Application Examples

mk Linear Technology 314 Track Roller Assemblies  332 for Versamove 410
Selecting a Linear Guide 316 Recirculating Application Examples
Ball Bearing Guides  384 for SPU 2040 414
Application Examples 392 Application Examples
for TKU 2040 416
Application Examples
for Handling Systems 418

5
 Benefits of mk Conveyor Technology

» Function modules
for conveying
and handling. «

mk conveyor technology modules can meet virtually

any requirement for the transport and handling
of piece goods. You can select from a range of
multi-industry, standardised and modular conveyor
systems, which can also be customised if required.
These systems can be combined with rotary tables
for buffering product and linear technology modules
for precise, dynamic handling tasks.

Conveyor Systems
mk offers the right conveyor system for virtually
every transported product and all operating condi-
tions. Simply enter your specific parameters into the
product filter on our website to display the suitable
system.

Rotary Tables
Rotary tables are ideal for maintaining continuous
material flows. Workpieces can be buffered, stored,
staggered or separated between work steps.

Linear Technology
mk linear technology is the name for our portfolio
of gliding assemblies, track roller assemblies and
recirculating ball bearing guides that provide highly
precise and reliable linear motion, and that are
designed to meet your specific requirements.

Accessories
To round off our conveyor technology, mk offers
a wide selection of drives, different stand variants,
various side rails, standardised and customised
pallets, initiators, stoppers, control components and
much more.

6 Information on Conveyor Technology

 1
Conveyor Systems

Benefits of mk
Conveyor Technology
Rotary Tables
 large selection of standardised, modular con-
A
veyor systems for optimal function with any
transported product and in any environment
Maximum process reliability thanks to sophisti-
cated technology, high-quality materials and
purchased parts, and rapid delivery of spare
parts worldwide
Built from standard modules to achieve cost
savings and short delivery times
 xpertise in designing and constructing custom
E
conveyors outside our standard product range
 lexibility ensured by compatibility with all mk
F Linear Technology
construction kit components and modules
mk sales engineers provide expert advice and
assistance in designing your system
 k QuickDesigner online configurator with CAD
m
model and quotations

Accessories

Information on Conveyor Technology 7

 Selecting a Conveyor Type

1 Factors that Influence the Information Required for

Configuration of the Conveyor Inquiries and Orders
The following factors influence the choice of con­ To ensure that the conveyor works in the optimum
veyor to be used for your task and environmental way for your requirements and environmental con­
conditions. ditions, we require all the specifications for the in-
fluence factors specified above and a specification
The product to be transported of the conveyor that is as detailed as possible.
Weight of the individual product
Specification
Total weight
 GUF-P 2000 AC /.... /...
Shape of the contact surface
Size System designation
Temperature
Sensitivity to shock Drive version
Dry vs. damp
Oil content Conveyor length L [mm]
Sharp edges
Other product-specific properties Conveyor width B [mm]

The ambient conditions Drive location with motor orientation

Temperature Tail (infeed end and discharge end)
Contamination, for example, by dust or chemicals Belt type and any cleats or side walls
EX protection requirements Max. speed
Cleanroom conditions Speed mode (constant or controllable)
Food production areas
Reglomat (if controllable speed is required)
Humidity
Stand version, including working height
Side rail type
The transportation route
Any other accessories
 ransport on straight lines or around curves
T
Transport on one level or at different heights
Output quantity and speed Drive packages
Specified or unspecified orientation/ 0 - without motor (drive AA or BA)
transfer/handling of the product 1 - with motor (drive AC-AU, BC, BF, CA)
2 - with motor and switch
The operating mode 3 - with motor and control of speed and direction
 ontinuous operation or accumulated operation
C 4 - with motor and small controller
5 - with motor and positioning controller
Cycling operation, on/off operation
Stopping/positioning
Reverse operation
Make the process simple and use our QuickDesigner
online configurator at www.quickdesigner.com
or complete one of our request forms at
www.mk-group.com/service. Our Technical Sales
team is also happy to help you on site.

8 Information on Conveyor Technology

Ambient Conditions 1
When configuring a conveyor, we assume the usual ambient conditions in the production facility. That
is, the application is indoors at room temperature (RT), in a clean environment with the usual humidity of
< 60% and there is no condensation or dripping water.
Generally the range from +10° to +60° C is non-critical. In special cases (e.g. over longer lengths with a
temperature differential greater than 50° C), the elongation of the installed components in length must be
taken into account. Low temperatures down to -20° C are possible on request. Ambient temperatures
above 80° C are only briefly permissible for most plastics. Ambient temperatures higher than 150° C are only
permissible for aluminium base structures after testing. However, the temperatures for contact between the
product and transport medium of up to 200° C are possible when using steel chains.
We are happy to provide consultation for applications in cleanrooms and sterile areas, applications with
hygiene or pharmaceutical specifications, usage in harsh environmental conditions, potentially explosive
atmospheres and painting applications.

Continuous Operation/Accumulated Operation

In continuous operation, the conveyor and the product run without interruption. The goods to be conveyed are
supplied to the running conveyor and conveyed further. During accumulated operation, the conveyor continues
to run below the accumulated, stationary product. Note that the motor power during accumulated operation
must be approximately twice as high as it is in continuous operation (see diagram on page 12).

On/Off Operation
The conveyor is switched on and off as needed. This is usual for parts discharge or manual removal. We also
always recommend on/off operation to reduce wear if it is foreseeable that no action will occur for more than
30s. For clean rooms especially, this is strongly recommended to avoid unnecessary contamination. If the con-
veyor is deactivated more than four times per minute, this is classified as cycling operation (startup with a load
only with a soft start).

Cycling Operation
As a rule, the cycling operation is a fixed cycle that is repeated. If there are more than 30 cycles per minute,
servo drives are usually required. Rates of more than 60 cycles per minute are available on request, but they
require a detailed assessment of the application. The time available for transport and the required acceleration
are important for the motor configuration. During acceleration, pay attention to the static friction of the product
on the transport medium. See page 12 for additional information.

Positioning Operation
For positioning operation, the product is usually positioned with pinpoint precision in a controlled machining
process, so that it then can be picked off, for example. For positioning operation, the specification of the
accuracy to be achieved is important. Repeatability means that the product is repeatedly moved to the same
point under the same conditions. Positioning accuracy is the absolute accuracy even with changing loads.
Positioning accuracy in a range of ± 10 mm is possible with simple devices, such as initiators or light barriers.
As a rule, the range of ± 5 mm requires a positive-locking drive and control with signal transducers. The range
of ± 1 mm represents the transition to the linear technology. This accuracy, including transverse to the con­
veying direction, requires the means of transport to be guided precisely and the position of the product to be
fixed on the conveyor.

Information on Conveyor Technology 9

 Selecting a Conveyor Type

1 Belt Conveyors Ê Page 18

 transporting piece goods without specific requirements regarding
For
the product’s position and orientation
Closed belt surface for products with any product geometry
Choose from a continuous range of different widths and lengths
Belt runs quietly and with low wear, even at high speeds

Large selection of belts for various products and applications, e.g.
with product accumulation, suitable for food contact, antistatic, etc.
Custom arrangement of transverse cleats and side walls

Widths [mm] Lengths [mm] Total load [kg] Speed [m/min] Double-line Incline Curves
50-2000 300-20000 up to 200 as standard up to 80 yes yes yes

Modular Belt Conveyors Ê Page 116

 transporting piece goods without specific requirements regarding
For
the product’s position, orientation or the product geometry

Positive drive mechanism eliminates slippage and makes it suitable
for wet applications; permeable chains also available

Various robust chain materials to accommodate high temperatures,
contact with chemicals or food
Stable chain travel regardless of the length/width ratio
Products can be moved diagonally
 variety of track layouts, including curves, are possible with just one
A
drive

Widths [mm] Lengths [mm] Total load [kg] Speed [m/min] Double-line Incline Curves
200-1000 400-10000 up to 250 as standard up to 30 — yes yes

Timing Belt Conveyors Ê Page 152


Ideal for the cycled transport of pallets or products with a rigid
structure
Precise positioning via positive drive mechanism

Selection of various timing belts with surface coatings customised
for the specific application

High speeds and accelerations possible with quiet and smooth
operation

Suitable pallets, lift-and-transfer modules, stoppers, positioning units,
rotating units and control components available

Widths [mm] Lengths [mm] Total load [kg] Speed [m/min] Double-line Incline Curves
40-2000 500-6000 up to 250 as standard up to 60 yes — —

10 Information on Conveyor Technology

Chain Conveyors Ê Page 182 1

Ideal as a dual or multiple line system for transporting pallets with
heavy loads, including in accumulated operation

Various chains and wear strips provide optimal support for the
workpiece or pallet
Suitable for dirty and oily environments
Robust and temperature resistant

Suitable pallets, lift-and-transfer modules, stoppers, positioning units,
rotating units and control components available

Widths [mm] Lengths [mm] Total load [kg] Speed [m/min] Double-line Incline Curves
200-2000 500-10000 up to 1000 as standard up to 30 yes — —

Flat Top Chain Conveyors Ê Page 226


Typically used for transporting bottles, cans or small containers in
feeding and interlinking applications

Complex, three-dimensional track layouts can be constructed with a
single conveyor, eliminating joints and transitions

Positive drive mechanism eliminates slippage and makes it suitable
for wet applications

Various chains (including stainless steel) are available depending on
the application, e.g. use in the food industry, etc.
Suitable for position-based transport using pallets

Widths [mm] Lengths [mm] Total load [kg] Speed [m/min] Double-line Incline Curves
45–300 600–30000 up to 200 as standard Up to 60 Yes Yes Yes

Roller Conveyors Ê Page 244

Rollers mounted on ball bearings for high loads with low drive power
 transporting piece goods such as solid boxes or pallets with rigid,
For
flat bases

Various drive concepts (gravity, tangential chain drive or drive rollers)
available for different applications
Friction rollers allow for accumulated operation

You can employ segmentation to implement different speeds or start/
stop functions in a single conveying path
Sturdy, affordable and easy to extend

Widths [mm] Lengths [mm] Total load [kg] Speed [m/min] Double-line Incline Curves
150-1050 200-10000 up to 400 as standard up to 70 — — yes

Information on Conveyor Technology 11

 Selecting a Drive

1 Speed – continuous operation compared to cycling operation

The diagrams show the need for a higher maximum speed in cycling operation compared to continuous
operation. In addition, they show an example of the course of a cycling operation with soft start-up and
standstill for a different action (e.g. to process the conveyed product).

Continuous operation compared

to cycling operation Example of cycling operation
Speed v [m/s] Speed v [m/s]

Vmax
Cycling operation
(a=const.)
a=soft a=0 a=const.

Vmedium
Continuous ope- Standstill
ration (a=0) for other
action

0 a = acceleration Time t [s] 0 Acceleration Full load Delay Time t [s]

Selecting motors based on speed and load

This diagram can be used to determine the motor power required based on the total load (transported
material + medium of transport) and the speed. The values shown correspond to a kinetic friction value
of μ=0.3, which is the friction between the belt and the underlying plate in a belt conveyor.

Total load m [kg]

350

300
0.75 kW with
250 roll friction µ=0.15

200

150
0,75 kW
100 0,55 kW
0,37 kW
50 0.12 kW
during accumulated 0,25 kW
operation, µ=0.6
0 0,12 kW
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Speed [m/min]

Example of the effect on the permissible total load and speed when the friction coefficient is
halved from a belt conveyor (µ=0.3) to a roller conveyor (µ=0.15)
Example of the effect on the permissible total load and speed when the friction coefficient is
doubled from continuous operation (µ=0.3) to accumulated operation (µ=0.6)

12 Information on Conveyor Technology

Drive Location 1
The head drive is located on the discharge end of the conveyor and pulls the transport medium, e.g. the belt.
This is the most common, safest and most affordable drive position. If you have location restrictions, you can
also install a head drive on the infeed end for use as a rear drive (pushing). In this case, however, you must
provide adequate pre-tension and prevent the transport medium from getting kinked.
Lower belt drives, which are also called centre drives, can be installed in various locations below the transport
level. The primary application for these drives is reverse operation (reversible conveying direction), since the
transport medium is always pulled, preventing the problems that arise when the belt is pushed. You can achieve
fixed installation lengths by selecting the design with a tensioning roller in the centre drive. Since two snub
rollers are typically used, this drive is also known as an omega drive. A further benefit of this drive is the option
to install knife edges on both the infeed and discharge ends for transferring small products.
Internal drives with a drum motor produce small obstructing edges, making them particularly popular for
applications with limited installation space. They are also popular in clean environments, since they exhibit low
particle emissions and have few surfaces on which dirt can deposit.

Drive Type
In the most commonly used indirect drives, force is transferred using a chain or timing belt. This additional
option to adjust the transmission ratio allows you to achieve very fine speed increments and compensate for
alignment errors. With servo and stepper motors, a timing belt can be used to dampen the abrupt, jerky starting
behaviour.
With a direct drive, the motor is connected directly to the drive shaft, offering a compact and low-maintenance
alternative.

Motor Selection
Our standard product range also includes a variety of different stock equipment motors from well-known
manufacturers. These gearmotors, consisting of asynchronous AC motors as standard or DC motors, com­
bined with a Spiroplan, helical-worm or helical gearbox, meet efficiency class II and IP 54. Custom motors,
servomotors, UL-CSA approval and multi-range motors are also available as options.

Speeds
The maximum conveying speed depends on the motor selected, the load on the belt, the operating mode
and other factors. The speeds provided here are nominal values and may deviate due to the speed toler­ances
of the motors (up to ± 10%). For indirect drives using chains or timing belts, the tolerance tends to be even
higher, at up to 20% above the nominal speed. Higher speeds are also achieved when the system is operated
on a 60 Hz grid, for example in the USA. If you need a precisely defined speed, this can be accomplished with
an mk reglomat.

Adjustment Ranges
The mk reglomat lets you control the conveyor speed within a range of 1:7 (10–70 Hz), assuming an
alternating current and the nominal speed at 50 Hz. For internal drives (drum motors), the adjustment
range is 1:3 (20–60 Hz). With direct current, the range is 1:6 (0.25–1.5 A or 0.5–3 A).

Information on Conveyor Technology 13

 Selecting a Drive

1 A – Head Drives
Head drive without motor
This drive version with an open drive journal
AA can be connected to a conveyor with a motor
for parallel operation

Standard head drive

Drive version with a variety of combination
AC options for motors, gearboxes and sprocket
wheels

Direct head drive

AF Compact and low-maintenance drive version with
a motor that is fitted directly on the drive shaft

Head drive, compact

AD Drive version with minimal interference contours
thanks to small gear motor, available with direct
AG current motor or three-phase motor

Head drive, offset

Thanks to the variably configurable head drive,
AM there are no interference contours at the
discharge end of the conveyor

Head drive, laterally on the outside, compact

AS A drive version restricted to a minimum total
height with motor mounted on the outside

Head drive, laterally on the outside

Since the motor is mounted laterally from the
AU outside, the space underneath and above the
conveyor remains free of interference contours

14 Information on Conveyor Technology

 B – Lower Belt Drives 1
Lower belt drive without motor
Drive unit variably mounted underneath the
BA conveyor, enables connection on a conveyor
with motor for parallel operation

Lower belt drive, standard

Possibility of reverse operation and configuration
BC of knife edges, at both the infeed end and
discharge end

Lower belt drive, direct

BF Compact and low-maintenance drive version with
a motor that is fitted directly on the drive shaft

C – Internal Drives
Drum motor
Maintenance-free and compact drive version
CA without exterior interference contour with a
drive version as a driving roll

The drive versions are shown on the belt conveyor in the example

Drive Location Motor Orientation

The drive location determines how and where the As shown in the figures, the motor orientation can vary
drive, including the motor, is installed. You can choose between 0°, 90°, 180° and 270°. If the customer does
to position the drive on the infeed or discharge end, not specify the drive location, the drive is deliv­ered on
above or below the conveyor frame, on the left or on the discharge end, on the left side, below the conveyor
the right. and with a motor orientation of 0°.

BottomTop
Right
Conveyin
g directi
on

Left

Discharge end Infeed end

Information on Conveyor Technology 15

 QuickDesigner – The Conveyor Technology Configurator

» Your conveyor at
the push of a button. «
Our “QuickDesigner” online configurator lets you
create a custom mk belt conveyor based on your
exact requirements quickly and easily. You do not
require any software; time-consuming installation
is dispensed with.

Simply enter quickdesigner.com in your browser,

click Start, and that’s it.

Your on-screen entries are checked for plausibility

immediately, to ensure that you are always offered
the optimal conveyor. All the entry fields have an
info button with detailed instructions to make the
tool as easy as possible to use.

When your desired conveyor is complete, you can

immediately generate a CAD model and a quote.
In “My Account”, you can also access and edit the
configurations you create and their models and
quotations at any time.

If you place an order, we have all the relevant data

in the system, which makes the whole process,
including the delivery, much quicker. Even if you
require a special solution, we design it on the basis
of the created standard model. A cost advantage
for you.

desig ner.com
www.quick

16 Information on Conveyor Technology

 1

Benefits of mk
QuickDesigner

 uick, simple and based on your specific

Q
requirements
Available any time, anywhere (24/7)
Can be used on a mobile device
Live view during configuration
CAD model and quotations
Save configurations and edit them later
In-depth support
German/English

CAD
model

CAD model
+ quotation

Information on Conveyor Technology 17

 Chapter 2 Belt Conveyors

Selecting a Belt Conveyor Belt Conveyor

Belt Conveyor 20 GUF-P MINI 22 GUF-P 2045 32
Head Drives 24 Internal Drive 34
Lower Belt Drives 28 Tails35
Tails30

Belt Conveyor Belt Conveyor Belt Conveyor

GUF-P 2000 36 GUF-P 2041 52 GUF-P 2004 62
Head Drives 38 Head Drives 54 Head Drives 64
Lower Belt Drives 45 Lower Belt Drives 58 Tails68
Internal Drives 48 Internal Drives 59
Tails49 Tails60

18 Belt Conveyors
 2

Incline Conveyor Belt Curved Belt Conveyor Double Belt Conveyor

KFG-P 2000 70 KGF-P 2040 80 DGF-P 2001 84
Head Drives 72 Lower Belt Drives 82 Head Drives 86
Variant ECO 76 Stands and Order Specifications Pallets87
Stands78 83
Side Rail and Sample Order 79

Belts 88 Cleats and Side Walls 92 Application Examples 96

Belt Conveyors 19
 Selecting a Belt Conveyor

Dimensions – Technical Data

Conveyor Conveyor Conveyor Total load* Speed ø of tails Reverse Accumu- Cycling
system widths lengths as standard, up to [mm] operation lated operation
2 [mm] [mm] up to [kg] [m/min] operation

Belt conveyors
GUF-P MINI 75/100/150 360-5000 25 50 22/32 • • •
275/300/350/
GUF-P 2045
400/500
600-2500 15 - 50 • • •

GUF-P 2000 50-800 380-10000 75 80 10/12/19/53 • • •

GUF-P 2041 200-1200 540-10000 150 60 22/85 • • •
GUF-P 2004 200-2000 720-20000 200 60 105 • •
Incline conveyor belt
KFG-P 2000 300–700 1400–4000 40 15 53 •
Curved belt conveyor
KGF-P 2040 300–600 90°/180° 30 30 19 •
Double belt conveyor
DGF-P 2001 100–250 300–2000 15 15 25 • •
*Maximum load that is transported by the system in question with a standard configuration and for a standard application. The
permissible load depends on the width, roller diameter, belt type, pre-tension, load distribution, operating mode and environmental
influences.

System Selection
... Based on Load and Conveyor Width
The diagram can be used as a basis for determining the permissible total load based on the conveyor
width of each conveyor system. The values included apply to the max. tail diameter per system and a belt
with a strength K1% of 5 to 8 N/mm.

Total load [kg]

350
GUF-P 2004
300

250
GUF-P 2041
200

150

100
GUF-P 2000

50

0 GUF-P MINI

0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 2000 Width [mm]

20 Belt Conveyors
Conveyor Width
The conveyor width is the width of the conveyor frame without the tails. The belt is narrower to allow for
self-adjusting tracking, between 10 and 50 mm depending on the system. 2
Conveyor Length
The conveyor length is a nominal dimension and is defined as the outer distance of the head parts when
the system is not tensioned. The actual conveyor length is longer and is calculated based on the following
aspects (specifications apply at an ambient temperature of 20°):
Belt tensioning distance of approx. 0.3% of the conveyor length
Belt length tolerance of up to 0.8% of the conveyor length
Belt thickness tolerance of 1 to 5 mm per side
Rollers protruding over the head parts by 1 to 3.5 mm per side
If a precisely defined installation length is strictly required, this can be accomplished using lower belt
drives.

Length-Width Ratio
To ensure that the belt runs safely and stably, the conveyor must not fall below or exceed a specific
length-width ratio (1:1 to 50:1).
A stable area without restrictions has a ratio of length to width from 2:1 to 20:1 (i.e. from twice as long as
wide, to 20 times as long as wide).
Likewise, a range from 1.5:1 to 2:1 is also usually possible without restrictions, but requires a design test.
The range of 1:1 to 1.5:1 can only be implemented with supplemental measures and restrictions.
In the range of 20:1 to 50:1, only laterally stiff belts must be used; in addition, transverse forces are no
longer permissible. They occur, for example, when there is lateral movement, lateral product discharge,
lateral product transfer, lateral product alignment using a side rail and asymmetric load distribution.

Speed
The maximum conveying speed depends on the motor selected, the load capacity, the operating mode and
other factors.
With an indirect chain drive with a ø 50 mm roller, a speed of up to 80 m/min is possible. The selection of a
timing belt for force transmission is recommended for 30 m/min or higher, and is standard for 60 m/min or
higher and cycling operation. Slim rollers are balanced for speeds of 60 m/min or higher, and dynamically
balanced for 100 m/min or higher.
For high speeds, it is sensible to choose large driving rolls (e.g. for 80 m/min with the GUF-P 2000, a BC
drive with a ø 88 mm roller).

Adjustment Ranges
The mk reglomat lets you control the conveyor speed within a range of 1:7 (10–70 Hz), assuming an
alternating current and the nominal speed at 50 Hz. For internal drives (drum motors), the adjustment
range is 1:3 (20–60 Hz). With direct current, the range is 1:6 (0.25–1.5 A or 0.5–3 A).

Belt Conveyors 21
 Belt Conveyor GUF-P MINI

» Transport and
separate small products
with low volume
and weight. «
The low installation height and the lower side
walls for placing the conveyor directly onto the
machine bed are ideal for the direct discharge
of light and small products (from an injection
moulding machine, for instance). The small tail
diameters prevent large gaps during product
transfer. The profile design ensures a torsion-
resistant structure with good load-bearing
properties. The values for the total load, speeds,
and so on, specified below are directly related
to this design and may vary as a result.

The driving rolls of the various drive versions

can be rubberised to suit the application, so that
motor torque can be optimally transmitted.
Crowned driving and idler rollers simplify belt
adjustment and help the belt to run in the centre
of the conveyor frame. A stainless steel sheet is
mounted under the running surface of the belt to
ensure sustained wear resistance. The conveyor
frame keys ensure that the belt returns within the
conveyor frame.

22 Belt Conveyors
 2

Benefits of the GUF-P MINI

 ransport and separate small products with low

T
volume and weight
 ery low installation height for easy integration into
V
complex systems
 elt recirculation integrated into the conveyor frame
B
to permit placement directly on the machine bed
 ery small tail diameters keep gaps at product
V
transfer points narrow
 ide variety of drive units and belt designs to suit
W
any application
 rofile design provides a torsion-resistant structure
P
and good load-bearing properties
 lexible operation in reverse, accumulated and
F
cycling mode

Cross Section

Profile mk 2075

Profile mk 2100

Profile mk 2150

Belt Conveyors 23
 GUF-P MINI AA

Properties
The drive version AA without a motor offers the advantage of operating multiple conveyor belts in parallel
2 or in series with one drive. The compact conveyor frame design makes it easier to integrate the conveyor
into existing systems. The ø 53 mm driving roll combined with the snub roller ensures excellent transmissi-
on of the motor power. Operation with cleated belts is not possible with this version. The ø 16 mm shaft
journal and usable length of 19 mm is designed with a DIN 6885 key (5 x 5 x 16 mm).

B20.75.009

Tails see
page 30

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 360 to 5000 mm

Conveyor width B 75 mm, 100 mm and 150 mm

Belt width B-15 mm from p. 88

Drive and speed up to v=60 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 25 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 10 kg/m p. 20

24 Belt Conveyors
GUF-P MINI AC

Properties
The compact conveyor frame design with the most popular drive variants makes it easier to integrate the
conveyor into existing systems. The ø 53 mm driving roll combined with the snub roller ensures excellent 2
transmission of the motor power. Operation with cleated belts is not possible with this version.

B20.75.001

Tails see
page 30

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 360 to 5000 mm

Conveyor width B 75 mm, 100 mm and 150 mm

Belt width B-15 mm from p. 88

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath;

infeed end on request

Drive and speed up to v=60 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 25 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 10 kg/m

Belt Conveyors 25
 GUF-P MINI AD

Properties
The compact conveyor frame design and drive makes it easier to integrate the conveyor into existing
2 systems. Without a snub roller, the ø 32 mm driving roll enables the use of cleated belts. In comparison
to the drive version AC, the drive is once again much more compact.

B20.75.033

Tails see
page 30

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 370 to 5000 mm

Conveyor width B 75 mm, 100 mm and 150 mm

Belt width B-15 mm from p. 88

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath;

infeed end on request

Drive and speed up to v=15 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 15 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 10 kg/m p. 20

26 Belt Conveyors
GUF-P MINI AG

Properties
For the compact drive version AG, mk offers a multitude of drive motors (direct current or three-phase
motors) tailored to various speed and load capacity requirements. The compact conveyor frame design 2
makes it easier to integrate the conveyor into existing systems. Without a snub roller, the ø 32 mm
driving roll enables the use of cleated belts. In comparison to the drive version AC, the drive is once again
much more compact.

B20.75.004

Tails see
page 30

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 370 to 5000 mm

Conveyor width B 75 mm, 100 mm and 150 mm

Belt width B-15 mm from p. 88

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath;

infeed end on request

Drive and speed up to v=15 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 15 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 10 kg/m p. 20

Belt Conveyors 27
 GUF-P MINI BA

Properties
The drive variant BA without a motor provides the advantage of operating multiple conveyor belts in parallel
2 with one drive. The compact conveyor frame design and the ability to freely select the drive position over
the entire length of the conveyor make it easier to integrate the conveyor into existing systems. The con-
veying direction is reversible. Operation with cleated belts is not possible with this version. The driving roll
has a hollow shaft design with ø 20 mm with keyway in accordance with DIN 6885.

B20.75.030

Tails see
page 30

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 550 to 5000 mm

Conveyor width B 75 mm, 100 mm and 150 mm

Belt width B-15 mm from p. 88

Drive and speed up to v=60 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 25 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 10 kg/m p. 20

28 Belt Conveyors
GUF-P MINI BC

Properties
For the drive version BC, mk offers a multitude of drive motors tailored to various speed and load capacity
requirements. The compact conveyor frame design and the ability to freely select the drive position over 2
the entire length of the conveyor make it easier to integrate the conveyor into existing systems. The con-
veying direction is reversible. Operation with cleated belts is not possible with this version.

B20.75.005

Tails see
page 30

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 550 to 5000 mm

Conveyor width B 75 mm, 100 mm and 150 mm

Belt width B-15 mm from p. 88

Drive location left/right underneath

Drive and speed up to v=60 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 25 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 10 kg/m p. 20

Belt Conveyors 29
 GUF-P MINI Tails

Tail 01 Item no. B80.01.006

ø 22  rowned roller, ø 22 mm
C
2 Ball bearing 2RS1
Belt tensioning and adjustment on the side using
the tensioning elements
Min. length of the conveyed product for transfer
of 54 mm
Note the min. bend radius for the desired belt

Conveyor length L Conveyor width B L1 L2 Head part material

≤ 2,000 mm ≤ 150 mm 60 mm 90 mm Aluminium
> 2,000 mm ≤ 150 mm 100 mm 130 mm Aluminium

Tail 03 Item no. B80.01.001

ø 32  rowned roller, ø 32 mm
C
Ball bearing 2RS1
Belt tensioning and adjustment on the side using
the tensioning elements
Min. length of the conveyed product for transfer
of 74 mm
Note the min. bend radius for the desired belt
Optional laterally flush ø 32 tail also available

Conveyor length L Conveyor width B L1 L2 Head part material

≤ 2,000 mm ≤ 150 mm 75 mm 105 mm Aluminium
> 2,000 mm ≤ 150 mm 115 mm 145 mm Aluminium

30 Belt Conveyors
Tail 11 Item no. B80.01.007
ø 22  rowned roller, ø 22 mm
C
Ball bearing 2RS1 2
Belt tensioning and adjustment on the side using
the tensioning elements (approx. 25 mm of
clearance required on each side)
Min. length of the conveyed product for transfer
of 54 mm
Note the min. bend radius for the desired belt
Flush head parts

Conveyor length L Conveyor width B L1 L2 Head part material

≤ 5,000 mm ≤ 150 mm 105 mm — Aluminium

Tail 19 Item no. B80.01.004

ø 32  rowned roller, ø 32 mm
C
Ball bearing 2RS1
ø 10 mm shaft journal, length of 15 mm, keyway in
accordance with DIN 6885
C onnection of two conveying lines through one drive
(right, left or on both sides)
Min. length of the conveyed product for transfer
of 74 mm
Note the min. bend radius for the desired belt
Protruding head part (conveyor length L+5 mm)

Conveyor length L Conveyor width B L1 L2 Head part material

≤ 2,000 mm ≤ 150 mm 80 mm — Aluminium

Belt Conveyors 31
 Belt Conveyor GUF-P 2045

» For optimal integration

in systems with limited
installation space. «

The extremely compact GUF-P 2045 belt conveyor

is ideally suited for integration into systems with
limited installation space. The ø 50 mm drive roller
combined with the weight-optimised, 45 mm tall
conveyor frame profile produces a conveyor that is
extremely flat and without any obstructing edges.
The permitted total load of 15 kg is suit­able for
the majority of products typically found in the
packaging and plastics industries. The speed is
configured using the associated control board,
which is designed for connection to an on-site
voltage supply (DC 24 V).

Four different belts are available, with each offer­

ing either accumulation of the products or high
grip. Stands, side rails, reglomats and transverse
cleats are also available as accessories. The drive
roller, the slide bed and the idler roller are also
available in an optional stainless steel design.

32 Belt Conveyors
 2

Benefits of the GUF-P 2045

 imple and affordable solution for the packaging

S
and plastics industries
 rum motor for extremely flat conveyor frames
D
without obstructing edges
 or optimal integration in systems with limited
F
installation space
Control board for speed configuration
 lexible operation in reverse, accumulated and
F
cycling mode

Cross Section
B ≙ conveyor width

Profile mk 2045.41
Profile mk 2045.41

Belt Conveyors 33
 GUF-P 2045 CA

Properties
Since the motor is integrated into the driving roll, no obstructing edges protrude over the conveyor frame
2 structure. The conveyor can therefore easily be integrated into existing systems. Operation with cleated
belts is possible with this version.

B20.45.001
L B+27

ø50 L ø50 B+27

ø50 ø50

B
B

Control board

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 600 to 2500 mm

Conveyor width B 275, 300, 350, 400 and 500 mm length-width ratio at least 2:1

Belt width B-20 mm

Belt types GU-U0302-001WE good traction, white, FDA
GU-V0203-006DG limited accumulation capability, green
GU-U0202-053LB limited accumulation capability, blue, FDA
GU-U0303-054LB good traction, blue, FDA
Speed [m/min] 3.7 | 4.9 | 6.1 | 7.3 | 8.6 | 9.8 | 11 | can be configured using the supplied con-
12.2 | 13.4 | 14.6 | 15.9 | 17 | 18.3 | 19.5 | trol board (IP20, higher on request) cable
22 | 23.1 | 24.4 | 25.4 length 1 m (1.5 m available as an option)

up to 15 kg, accumulated operation:

Standard total load
max. 5 kg, cycling operation: max. 10 kg

Cycling operation max. 900 cycles/hour Minimum times: 2 s ON/2 s OFF

34 Belt Conveyors
GUF-P 2045 Tails

Tail 01 Item no. B80.45.001

ø 50 
Crowned roller, ø 53 mm
Ball bearing 2RS1
110 2
Belt tensioning and adjustment on the side using
the tensioning elements
Min. length of the conveyed product for transfer
of 114 mm

Conveyor length L Conveyor width B L1 L2 Head part material

≤ 2,500 mm ≤ 500 mm 105 mm 125 mm Aluminium

Belt Conveyors 35
 Belt Conveyor GUF-P 2000

» The all-rounder
with the maximum
number of variants. «
The combination of standard parts based on
the profile mk 2000 results in a conveyor sys­
tem that allows for the widest possible range
of drives and tails and extremely short delivery
times. Despite its low height of 50 mm and the
ø 53 mm driving roll, which can be coated with
rubber according to the application, the con-
veyor offers a wide range of different belt
types. As with all mk belt conveyor systems,
the round design of the driving and idler rollers
make belt adjustment significantly easier.

System slots running along both sides (10 mm

slot width based on our profile technology)
allow you to easily integrate the conveyors into
existing machine frames or attach stands, side
rails and other accessories. A further quality
feature of this conveyor system is the stain-
less steel sheet installed below where the belt
runs, which ensures long-term wear resistance
of the belt. In addition to our wide selection of
side rails and stands, we also offer a standard
range of end stops and electrical accessories.

36 Belt Conveyors
 2

Benefits of the GUF-P 2000

 ide range of different drives, tails, stands

W
and belt types
 uilt with the profile mk 2000 for a high load
B
capacity and torsion-resistant structure
 ptionally available with a stationary or
O
rolling knife edge
 lexible operation in reverse, accumulated
F
and cycling mode
Very short delivery times

Cross Section
B ≙ conveyor width

Profile mk 2000*
Profile mk 2000*

* For conveyor widths 75, 100, 150, 200 and 250 mm,
custom profiles are used

Belt Conveyors 37
 GUF-P 2000 AA

Properties
The drive variant AA without a motor offers the advantage of operating multiple conveyor belts in parallel
2 or in series with one drive. The compact conveyor frame design makes it easier to integrate the conveyor
into existing systems. The driving roll ø 53 mm has a round design for simple belt control. Operation with
cleated belts is possible with this version. The ø 16 mm shaft journal has a usable length of 20 mm with a
chain drive or 29 mm with a timing belt drive and is equipped with a DIN 6885 key.

B20.00.009
L B+10
B
ø53 ø53

ø 19/ø12 rolling

Tails from
page 49 ø10 sliding
B
20/29

ø16

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 380 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 mm others on
request

Belt width B-10 mm from p. 88

Drive and speed up to v=80 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 75 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 25 kg/m p. 20

38 Belt Conveyors
GUF-P 2000 AC

Properties
The compact conveyor frame design with the most popular drive variants makes it easier to integrate
the conveyor into existing systems. The ø 53 mm driving roller ensures excellent transmission of the motor 2
power. Operation with cleated belts is possible with this version.

B20.00.002
L B+11
B
ø 53 ø 53

ø 19/ø12 rolling

250
Tails from
144
page 49 ø10 sliding
36
B

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 410 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 mm others on
request

Belt width B-10 mm from p. 88

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath/above;

infeed end on request

Drive and speed up to v=80 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 75 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 25 kg/m p. 20

Belt Conveyors 39
 GUF-P 2000 AF

Properties
Since the motor is fitted directly onto the drive shaft, the space requirements and maintenance effort for
2 this drive version are reduced to a minimum.

B20.00.011
L B+10
B
ø 53 ø 53

ø 19/ø12 rolling

Tails from
page 49 ø10 sliding
B

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 410 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 mm others on
request

Belt width B-10 mm from p. 88

Drive location discharge end left/right; infeed end on request

Drive and speed 2.8; 3.7; 4.5; 5.5; 6.7; 7.9; 8.9; 11.2; 13.2 and 15.2 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 30 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 25 kg/m p. 20

40 Belt Conveyors
GUF-P 2000 AG

Properties
The compact drive version AG for small gearmotors (direct current or three-phase motors) has fewer inter-
fering edges in comparison to the AC drive version thanks to the gearbox type used. The compact conveyor 2
frame design makes it easier to integrate the conveyor into existing systems. Without a snub roller, the
ø 53 mm driving roller enables the use of cleated belts. In comparison to the drive version AC, the dimensi-
ons of the drive are much more compact.

B20.00.005
L B+11
B
ø 53 ø 53

175
ø 19/ø12 rolling

36
104 Tails from
page 49 ø10 sliding
B

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 380 to 6000 mm

Conveyor width B 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 mm others on
request

Belt width B-10 mm from p. 88

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath/above

Drive and speed up to v=15 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 30 kg AC/15 kg DC p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 25 kg/m p. 20

Belt Conveyors 41
 GUF-P 2000 AM

Properties
The compact conveyor frame design with the offset head drive makes it easier to integrate the conveyor
2 into existing systems. The ø 53 mm driving roller ensures excellent transmission of the motor power.
Operation with cleated belts is possible with this version.

B20.00.003
L B+10
B
ø 53 ø 53

ø 19/ø12 rolling

250
Tails from
page 49 ø10 sliding 36
325 144
B

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 750 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 mm others on
request

Belt width B-10 mm from p. 88

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath; infeed end on request

Drive and speed up to v=80 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 75 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 25 kg/m p. 20

42 Belt Conveyors
GUF-P 2000 AS

Properties
The drive located laterally on the outside allows the total height of the conveyor to be restricted to a
minimum. The ø 53 mm driving roller ensures excellent transmission of the motor power. Operation with 2
cleated belts is possible with this version.

B20.00.008
L B+10
B
ø 53 ø 53
130

ø 19/ø12 rolling

260 64
Tails from
page 49 ø10 sliding B

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 550 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 mm others on
request

Belt width B-10 mm from p. 88

Drive location discharge end left/right; infeed end on request

Drive and speed up to v=80 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 75 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 25 kg/m p. 20

Belt Conveyors 43
 GUF-P 2000 AU

Properties
The advantage of the drive version AU is that the motor is fitted on the outside of the conveyor belt,
2 which protects it from dirt. The space requirements for the conveyor in the lower run are much smaller
in com­parison. This drive version can transport even very tall products with ease. The ø 53 mm driving
roller ensures excellent transmission of the motor power. Operation with cleated belts is possible with
this version.

B20.00.020
L 47

ø 53 ø 53

200
ø 19/ø12 rolling B
150
B+11

Tails from
ø10 sliding
page 49
B

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 430 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 mm others on
request

Belt width B-10 mm from p. 88

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath/above;

infeed end on request

Drive and speed up to v=80 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 75 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 25 kg/m p. 20

44 Belt Conveyors
GUF-P 2000 BA

Properties
The drive variant BA without a motor provides the advantage of operating multiple conveyor belts in paral-
lel with one drive. The compact conveyor frame design and the ability to freely select the drive position 2
over the entire length of the conveyor make it easier to integrate the conveyor into existing systems. The
conveying direction is reversible. Knife edges can be configured on both the infeed and discharge end.
Operation with cleated belts is not possible with this version. The driving roller has a hollow shaft design
with ø 20 mm with keyway in accordance with DIN 6885.

B20.00.001
L B+12
B
ø 53 20 ø 53

189
ø 19/ø12 rolling ø 19/ø12 rolling

B+30
ø10 sliding ø 62/ø 88 ø10 sliding

L2 200
Tails from
page 49
B

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 700 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 mm others on
request

Belt width B-10 mm from p. 88

Drive and speed up to v=80 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 75 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 25 kg/m p. 20

Belt Conveyors 45
 GUF-P 2000 BC

Properties
The compact conveyor frame design and the ability to freely select the drive position over the entire length
2 of the conveyor make it easier to integrate the conveyor into existing systems. The conveying direction is
reversible. Knife edges can be configured on both the infeed and discharge end. Operation with cleated
belts is not possible with this version.

B20.00.004
L B+12
B
ø 53 ø 53

189
ø 19/ø12 rolling ø 19/ø12 rolling

326
235
ø 62/ø 88
ø10 sliding ø10 sliding

100

8
36
L2 200
Tails from
page 49
B

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 700 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 mm others on
request

Belt width B-10 mm from p. 88

Drive location left/right underneath

Drive and speed up to v=80 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 75 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 25 kg/m p. 20

46 Belt Conveyors
GUF-P 2000 BF

Properties
Since the motor is fitted directly onto the drive shaft, the space requirements and maintenance effort for
this drive version are reduced to a minimum. The compact conveyor frame design and the ability to freely 2
select the drive position over the entire length of the conveyor make it easier to integrate the conveyor into
existing systems. The conveying direction is reversible. Knife edges can be configured on both the infeed
and discharge end. Operation with cleated belts is not possible with this version.

B20.00.012
L B+12
B
ø 53 ø 53

189
ø 19/ø12 rolling ø 19/ø12 rolling

ø10 sliding ø 62/ø 88 ø10 sliding

L2 200
Tails from
page 49
B

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 700 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 mm others on
request

Belt width B-10 mm from p. 88

Drive location left/right underneath

Drive and speed 5; 6.3; 8; 9.5; 11.5; 13.5; 15.2; p. 12

19.3; 23; 26; 36.6; 45.7 and 57 m/min

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 75 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 25 kg/m p. 20

Belt Conveyors 47
 GUF-P 2000 CA

Properties
The drive version CA with drum motor is the most compact variant of the conveyors in the GUF-P 2000
2 system. Since the motor is integrated into the driving roller, no obstructing edges protrude over the conveyor
frame structure. The conveyor can therefore easily be integrated into existing systems. Operation with
cleated belts is not possible with this version.

B20.00.025

L B+52,5
B
ø 81,5 ø 53

100
ø 19/ø12 rolling
B+27

Tails from
page 49 ø10 sliding
B

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 440 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 700 and 800 mm others on
request

Belt width B-10 mm from p. 88

Drive location discharge end left/right

Drive and speed up to v=60 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 55 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 25 kg/m p. 20

48 Belt Conveyors
GUF-P 2000 Tails

Tail 01 Item no. B80.00.001

ø 53 
Crowned roller, ø 53 mm
Ball bearing 2RS1
114 2
Belt tensioning and adjustment on the side using
the tensioning elements
Min. length of the conveyed product for transfer
of 114 mm

Conveyor length L Conveyor width B L1 L2 Head part material

≤ 2,900 mm ≤ 300 mm 105 mm 145 mm Plastic
≤ 2,900 mm > 300 mm 105 mm 145 mm Aluminium
> 2,900 mm ≤ 800 mm 155 mm 195 mm Aluminium

Tail 09 Item no. B80.00.005

ø 53 
Crowned roller, ø 53 mm
Ball bearing 2RS1
Belt tensioning via head parts
Belt adjustment from the front using threaded
pins
Obstructing edge-optimised tail
Min. length of the conveyed product for transfer
of 114 mm

Conveyor length L Conveyor width B L1 L2 Head part material

≤ 3,000 mm ≤ 800 mm 105 mm — Aluminium

Tail 11 Item no. B80.00.007

ø 53 Crowned roller, ø 53 mm
Ball bearing 2RS1
Belt tensioning and adjustment on the side
using the head parts (approx. 35 mm of
clearance required on each side)
Flush head parts
Obstructing edge-optimised tail
Min. length of the conveyed product for transfer
of 114 mm

Conveyor length L Conveyor width B L1 L2 Head part material

≤ 3,000 mm ≤ 800 mm 105 mm — Aluminium

Belt Conveyors 49
 GUF-P 2000 Tails

Tail 19 Item no. B80.00.006

ø 53  rowned roller, ø 53 mm
C
2 Ball bearing 2RS1
ø 16 mm shaft journal, usable length of 20 mm
with roller for chain drive or 30 mm with roller
for timing belt drive, keyway in accordance with
DIN 6885
Connection of two conveying lines through one
drive
Output shaft available on the right, left or both sides

Conveyor length L Conveyor width B L1 L2 Head part material

≤ 2,900 mm ≤ 300 mm 105 mm 145 mm Plastic
≤ 2,900 mm > 300 mm 105 mm 145 mm Aluminium
> 2,900 mm ≤ 800 mm 155 mm 195 mm Aluminium
*Does not apply for the drive end

Tail 13 Item no. B80.00.018

ø 19  olling knife edge
R
ø 19 mm roller, ball bearing 2RS1
Belt tensioning on the side using tensioning 48
elements
Adjustment using tensioning elements
Min. length of the conveyed product for transfer
of 48 mm
Note the min. bend radius for the desired belt

Conveyor length L Conveyor width B L1 L2 Head part material

≤ 3,000 mm ≤ 800 mm 116 mm 156 mm Aluminium
> 3,000 mm ≤ 800 mm 166 mm 206 mm Aluminium

50 Belt Conveyors
Tail 10 Item no. B80.00.017
ø 12  olling knife edge
R
ø 12 mm roller, ball bearing 2RS1
Belt tensioning on the side using tensioning
34 2
elements
Adjustment from the front using tensioning roller
Min. length of the conveyed product for transfer of
34 mm
Note the min. bend radius for the desired belt
Max. conveying speed of 30 m/min
Max. load capacity of 5 kg per 50 mm conveyor width

Conveyor length L Conveyor width B L1 L2 Head part material

≤ 3,000 mm ≤ 300 mm 111 mm 151 mm Aluminium
> 3,000 mm ≤ 300 mm 161 mm 201 mm Aluminium

Tail 17 Item no. B80.00.002

ø 10  tationary knife edge
S
Belt tensioning on the side using tensioning
elements
30
Adjustment from the front using tensioning roller
Min. length of the conveyed product for transfer
of 30 mm
Note the min. bend radius for the desired belt
Max. conveying speed of 10 m/min
Requires driving roller with rubber coating

Conveyor length L Conveyor width B L1 L2 Head part material

≤ 3,000 mm ≤ 300 mm 105 mm 145 mm Aluminium

Belt Conveyors 51
 Belt Conveyor GUF-P 2041

»highForload
applications with
capacities and
wide conveyed products. «

The torsion-resistant conveyor frame based on

the mk 2251 profile (50 x 80 mm) allows for
high load capacities. Drive and tail compon-
ents are also designed according to these load
capacities.

The ø 85 mm driving roller used in this conveyor

system also features excellent grip for trans-
mitting the motor power to the belt. A major
benefit of this system is its nearly unlimited
selection of different belt types for use in
combination with cleats and side walls.

In addition to these benefits, the two system

slots (10 mm slot width) on each side give you
maximum flexibility for integrating the convey-
or system into existing systems or for atta-
ching stands, side rails and other accessories.
Other high-quality features include crowned
rollers for simple belt adjustment and a wear-
resistant belt slide bed made from galvanised
steel.

52 Belt Conveyors
 2

Benefits of the GUF-P 2041

For high load capacities and wide product

 uilt with the profile mk 2251 for a high load
B
capacity and torsion-resistant structure
 ide range of different drives, tails, stands
W
and belt types
 ptionally available with a compact drum
O
motor and knife edge
 lexible operation in reverse, accumulated
F
and cycling mode

Cross Section
B ≙ conveyor width

Profile mk 2251
Profile mk 2251

Belt Conveyors 53
 GUF-P 2041 AA

Properties
The drive variant AA without a motor offers the advantage of operating multiple conveyor belts in parallel
2 or in series with one drive. The compact conveyor frame design makes it easier to integrate the conveyor
into existing systems. The driving roller ø 85 mm has a round design for simple belt control. Operation with
cleated belts is possible with this version. The ø 20 mm shaft journal with a length of 27.5 mm is designed
with a DIN 6885 key.

B20.40.009

Drive shaft on both sides also possible. Tails from

Please specify when ordering. page 60

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 540 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 1200 mm (in 100 mm increments) others on

request

Belt width B-15 mm from p. 88

Drive and speed up to v=60 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 150 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 50 kg/m p. 20

54 Belt Conveyors
GUF-P 2041 AC

Properties
The compact conveyor frame design with the most popular drive variants makes it easier to integrate
the conveyor into existing systems. The ø 85 mm driving roller ensures excellent transmission of the motor 2
power. Operation with cleated belts is possible with this version.

B20.40.001

Tails from
page 60

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 540 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 1200 mm (in 100 mm increments) others on

request

Belt width B-15 mm from p. 88

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath/above,

infeed on request

Drive and speed up to v=60 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 150 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 50 kg/m p. 20

Belt Conveyors 55
 GUF-P 2041 AF

Properties
Since the motor is fitted directly onto the drive shaft, the space requirements and maintenance effort for
2 this drive version are reduced to a minimum.

B20.40.008

Tails from
page 60

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 560 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 1200 mm (in 100 mm increments) others on

request

Belt width B-15 mm from p. 88

Drive location discharge end left/right; infeed end on request

Drive and speed 4.7; 6; 7.5; 9; 11; 13; 14.5; 18.5; 22; p. 12
25; 35; 43.5 and 54.5 m/min

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 100 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 50 kg/m p. 20

56 Belt Conveyors
GUF-P 2041 AS

Properties
The drive positioned laterally on the outside allows the total height of the conveyor to be restricted to a
minimum. The ø 85 mm driving roller ensures excellent transmission of the motor power. Operation with 2
cleated belts is possible with this version.

B20.40.003

Tails from
page 60

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 700 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 1200 mm (in 100 mm increments) others on

request

Belt width B-15 mm from p. 88

Drive location discharge end left/right; infeed end on request

Drive and speed up to v=60 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 150 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 50 kg/m p. 20

Belt Conveyors 57
 GUF-P 2041 BC

Properties
The compact conveyor frame design and the ability to freely select the drive position over the entire length
2 of the conveyor make it easier to integrate the conveyor into existing systems. The conveying direction is
reversible. Knife edges can be configured on both the infeed and discharge end. Operation with cleated
belts is not possible with this version.

B20.40.004

Tails from
page 60

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 800 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 1200 mm (in 100 mm increments) others on

request

Belt width B-15 mm from p. 88

Drive location left/right underneath

Drive and speed up to v=60 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 150 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 50 kg/m p. 20

58 Belt Conveyors
GUF-P 2041 CA

Properties
The drive version CA with drum motor is the most compact variant of the conveyors in the GUF-P 2041
system. Since the motor is integrated into the driving roller, no obstructing edges protrude over the conveyor 2
frame structure. The conveyor can therefore easily be integrated into existing systems.

B20.40.005

Tails from
page 60

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 540 to 3000 mm

Conveyor width B 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, others on
700, 800, 900 and 1000 mm request

Belt width B-15 mm from p. 88

Drive location discharge end left/right

Drive and speed up to v=60 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 55 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 50 kg/m p. 20

Belt Conveyors 59
 GUF-P 2041 Tails

Tail 01 Item no. B80.07.001

ø 85  rowned roller, ø 85 mm
C
2 Ball bearing 2RS1
180
Belt tensioning and adjustment on the side
using the tensioning elements
Min. length of the conveyed product for
transfer of 180 mm

Conveyor length L Conveyor width B L1 L2 Head part material

≤ 3,000 mm ≤ 1,200 mm 160 mm 175 mm Aluminium
≤ 3,000 mm ≤ 1,200 mm 250 mm 265 mm Aluminium

Tail 02 Item no. B80.07.009

ø 85  85 mm cylindrical roller
ø
Ball bearing 2RS1
Belt tensioning and adjustment from the front
using tensioning axles
Min. conveyed product length of 180 mm
for transfer
Only for outputting conveyed product in
longitudinal direction

Conveyor length L Conveyor width B L1 L2 Head part material

≤ 3,000 mm ≤ 1,200 mm 150 mm — Aluminium

60 Belt Conveyors
Tail 13 Item no. B80.07.010
ø 22  oller, ø 22 mm
R
Ball bearing 2RS1 2
Belt tensioning on the side using tensioning
elements
Adjustment using tracking roller
Min. length of the conveyed product for
transfer of 54 mm
Note the min. bend radius for the desired belt

Conveyor length L Conveyor width B L1 L2 Head part material

≤ 3,000 mm ≤ 1,200 mm 158 mm 173 mm Aluminium, short
> 3,000 mm ≤ 1,200 mm 220 mm 235 mm Aluminium, long

Tail 19 Item no. B80.07.002

ø 85  rowned roller, ø 85 mm
C
Ball bearing 2RS1
ø 20 shaft journal, length of 27.5 mm, keyway
in accordance with DIN 6885
Connection of two conveying lines through
one drive
Output shaft available on the left, right or
both sides

Conveyor length L Conveyor width B L1 L2 Head part material

≤ 3,000 mm ≤ 1,200 mm 160 mm — Aluminium
> 3,000 mm ≤ 1,200 mm 250 mm — Aluminium

Belt Conveyors 61
 Belt Conveyor GUF-P 2004

» Ideal for
conveying bulky or
heavy products. «
Alongside some of the standard features of
mk belt conveyor systems, such as crowned
­rollers for better belt adjustment and wear­-
resistant belt slide beds made from galvanised
steel, a special feature of the GUF-P 2004
­system is its stable structure based on the
mk 2004 profile.

Capable of handling a total load of up to 200 kg

and products up to 2,000 mm wide and
20,000 mm long, this torsion-resistant conveyor
frame is perfect for transporting bulky product.
The ø 105 mm driving roller, which can be coated
in rubber depending on the load and conveyor
width, ensures excellent transmission of the
motor power to the belt.

The transport system can be supplemented with

a large variety of accessory components tailored
to the heavy transport weights, including side
rails and stands with a reinforced design.

62 Belt Conveyors
 2

Benefits of the GUF-P 2004

For very high load capacities and bulky product

 uilt with the mk 2004 profile for very high load
B
capacity and a torsion-resistant structure
 einforced stands and side rails available for
R
variable configuration
 lexible operation in reverse, accumulated and
F
cycling mode

Cross Section
B ≙ conveyor width

Profile mk 2004

Profile mk 2004

Belt Conveyors 63
 GUF-P 2004 AA

Properties
The drive variant AA without a motor offers the advantage of operating multiple conveyor belts in parallel
2 or in series with one drive. The compact conveyor frame design makes it easier to integrate the conveyor
into existing systems. The driving roller ø 105 mm has a round design for simple belt control. Operation with
cleated belts is possible with this version. The ø 22 mm shaft journal with a length of 32 mm is designed
with a DIN 6885 key.

B20.14.009

Drive shaft can also Tails see

be fitted on both sides page 68
Please specify when ordering.

Technical data
Belt length L individual from 720 to 20000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm (in 100 mm increments) others on

request

Belt width B-50 mm from p. 88

Drive and speed up to v=60 m/min

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 200 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 75 kg/m p. 20

64 Belt Conveyors
GUF-P 2004 AC

Properties
The compact conveyor frame design with the most popular drive variants makes it easier to integrate the
conveyor into existing systems. The ø 105 mm driving roller ensures excellent transmission of the motor 2
power. Operation with cleated belts is possible with this version.

B20.14.001

Tails see
page 68

Technical data
Belt length L individual from 720 to 20000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm (in 100 mm increments) others on

request

Belt width B-50 mm from p. 88

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath/above,

infeed on request

Drive and speed up to v=60 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 200 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 75 kg/m p. 20

Belt Conveyors 65
 GUF-P 2004 AM

Properties
The compact conveyor frame design with the offset drive makes it easier to integrate the conveyor into
2 existing systems. The ø 105 mm driving roller ensures excellent transmission of the motor power. Operation
with cleated belts is possible with this version.

B20.14.003

Tails see
page 68

Technical data
Belt length L individual from 920 to 20000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm (in 100 mm increments) others on

request

Belt width B-50 mm from p. 88

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath; infeed end on request

Drive and speed up to v=60 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 200 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 75 kg/m p. 20

66 Belt Conveyors
GUF-P 2004 AS

Properties
The drive positioned laterally on the outside allows the total height of the conveyor to be restricted to a
minimum. The ø 105 mm driving roller ensures excellent transmission of the motor power. Operation with 2
cleated belts is possible with this version.

B20.14.002

Tails see
page 68

Technical data
Belt length L individual from 870 to 20000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm (in 100 mm increments) others on

request

Belt width B-50 mm from p. 88

Drive location discharge end left/right; infeed end on request

Drive and speed up to v=60 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 200 kg p. 20

Standard distributed load up to 75 kg/m p. 20

Belt Conveyors 67
 GUF-P 2004 Tails

Tail 01 Item no. B80.02.004

ø 105  rowned roller, ø 105 mm
C
2 Ball bearing 2RS1
Belt tensioning and adjustment on the side 220
using the tensioning elements
Min. length of the conveyed product for transfer
of 220 mm

Tail 09 Item no. B80.02.005

ø 105 
Crowned roller, ø 105 mm
Ball bearing 2RS1
Belt tensioning and adjustment on the side
using the tensioning elements
ø 22 shaft journal, length of 32 mm, keyway
in accordance with DIN 6885
Connection of two conveying lines through
one drive
Output shaft available on the right,
left or both sides
Protruding head part (conveyor length L+5 mm)

68 Belt Conveyors
Notes

Belt Conveyors 69
 Incline Conveyor Belt KFG-P 2000

» Suitable for mobile

use for vertical transport
of small parts. «

The KFG-P 2000 and KFG-P 2000 ECO conveyor

systems are based on the mk 2000 profile and
their compact conveyor frame design makes
them ideal for demanding continuous duty in
multi-shift operation. As with all mk belt convey-
or systems, the round driving rolls make it easy
to adjust the belt. On inclines, the belt is guided
by welded-on longitudinal profiles.

Another quality feature is the stainless steel

sheet installed below the belt running surface,
which ensures long-term wear resistance. This
conveyor system is primarily used to transport
small parts (made from plastic, for instance).

The modular design of the conveyor system

combined with the general advantages of profile
technology make the conveyor excellently suited
for integration into existing systems or for use
as a mobile transport unit (e.g. for filling con­
tainers).

70 Belt Conveyors
 2
Benefits of the KFG-P 2000

Vertical transport for connecting different heights

Moving transport unit for mobile use
Ideal for integration into existing systems
 ompliant with the applicable Machinery
C
Directive and occupational safety regulations –
additional protective device guard not required
Belts can be replaced with little work
 ptional cycling operation and control with a
O
frequency inverter
Optional motor overload switch

Cross Section

exterior width B+80

B ≙ conveyor width
belt width B-15
usable width B-160

Profile mk 2040.01
Profile mk 2000
Profile mk 2000

Belt Conveyors 71
 KFG-P 2000 AC

Properties
The compact conveyor frame design with the most popular drive variants makes it easier to integrate
2 the conveyor into existing systems. The ø 53 mm driving roller ensures excellent transmission of the motor
power.

B20.00.010

Technical data
Conveyor length L (L1+L2+L3) variable up to approx. 4000 mm
L1/L3 min. = 400, L2 min. = 600

Conveyor width B 300 to 700 mm (in 100 mm increments) others on request

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath/above

Drive and speed up to 15 m/min others on request

Stand and side rail p. 78

Standard total load up to 40 kg higher on request

Standard distributed load up to 25 kg/m, 5 kg/compartment others on request

Belt incline a 30, 45 and 60° others on request

Conveyed product height up to 55 mm, length up to 300 mm others on request

72 Belt Conveyors
KFG-P 2000 AF

Properties
Since the motor is fitted directly onto the drive shaft, the space requirements and maintenance effort
for this drive version are reduced to a minimum. 2

B20.00.010

Technical data
Conveyor length L (L1+L2+L3) variable up to approx. 4000 mm
L1/L3 min. = 400, L2 min. = 600

Conveyor width B 300 to 700 mm (in 100 mm increments) others on request

Drive location discharge end left/right

Drive and speed 2.8, 5.5, 11.2, 15.2 m/min others on request

Stand and side rail p. 78

Standard total load up to 40 kg higher on request

Standard distributed load up to 25 kg/m, 5 kg/compartment others on request

Belt incline a 30, 45 and 60° others on request

Conveyed product height up to 55 mm, length up to 300 mm others on request

Belt Conveyors 73
 KFG-P 2000 AS

Properties
The drive located laterally on the outside allows the total height of the conveyor to be restricted to a mini-
2 mum. The compact conveyor frame design makes it easier to integrate the conveyor into existing systems.
The ø 53 mm driving roller ensures excellent transmission of the motor power.

B20.00.010

Technical data
Conveyor length L (L1+L2+L3) variable up to approx. 4000 mm
L1/L3 min. = 400, L2 min. = 600

Conveyor width B 300 to 700 mm (in 100 mm increments) others on request

Drive location discharge end left/right

Drive and speed up to 15 m/min others on request

Stand and side rail p. 78

Standard total load up to 40 kg higher on request

Standard distributed load up to 25 kg/m, 5 kg/compartment others on request

Belt incline a 30, 45 and 60° others on request

Conveyed product height up to 55 mm, length up to 300 mm others on request

74 Belt Conveyors
KFG-P 2000 AU

Properties
The advantage of the drive version AU is that the motor is fitted on the outside of the conveyor belt.
The compact conveyor frame design makes it easier to integrate the conveyor into existing systems. 2
The ø 53 mm driving roller ensures excellent transmission of the motor power.

B20.00.010

Technical data
Conveyor length L (L1+L2+L3) variable up to approx. 4000 mm
L1/L3 min. = 400, L2 min. = 600

Conveyor width B 300 to 700 mm (in 100 mm increments) others on request

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath/above

Drive and speed up to 15 m/min others on request

Stand and side rail p. 78

Standard total load up to 40 kg higher on request

Standard distributed load up to 25 kg/m, 5 kg/compartment others on request

Belt incline a 30, 45 and 60° others on request

Conveyed product height up to 55 mm, length up to 300 mm others on request

Belt Conveyors 75
 KFG-P 2000 ECO

Properties
ECO stands for economy: which means high quality materials and meeting customer requirements at an
2 attractive price. The limited number of variants ensures fast delivery and high availability. With the optimal
ratio of effective width to total width, the conveyor is ideal for integration in existing systems. Its mobility
means it can be used as a versatile transport unit for filling containers or pallet cages.

B20.00.015

Motor orientation 270°

Motor orientation 0°

Technical data
Conveyor length L (L1+L2+L3) 2400/2900 mm (L1 = 600 mm, L2 = 1300/1800 mm, L3 = 500 mm)

Conveyor width B 400, 500, 600 mm (usable width: B-160 mm)

Drive location discharge end left/right, above, 270° motor orientation, 0° for surcharge

Drive and speed 2.8; 5.5; 11.2; 15,2 m/min, others on request or with reglomat

Load capacity depending on conveying angle and speed, up to 40 kg

Belt incline a 30, 45 and 60°

Conveyed product height up to 55 mm, length up to 300 mm, weight up to 5 kg/compartment

Belt GU-V0106-028DG

Cleats and side walls high transverse cleats MT30 and 30 mm side wall, polyurethane, green
with L2=1300, 16 transverse cleats with 303 mm between cleats
with L2=1800, 19 transverse cleats with 308 mm between cleats

76 Belt Conveyors
Variants

B20.00.015

H [mm]
2
1750 m [kg]
40
a 30°

1500 30 a 45°

a 60°
20
1250

10
2,8 5,4 10,9 14,9 v
1000
 [m/min]

750

500

250

-500 -250 0 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 L [mm]

See the table for the optimal variant for your application. Without additional specifications, the conveyor is
designed with a top, front left, 270° drive location and speed of 5.4 m/min.

Variant (L2 1300 mm) A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9

Conveyor width B [mm] 400 400 400 500 500 500 600 600 600

Belt incline a 30° 45° 60° 30° 45° 60° 30° 45° 60°

Variant (L2 1800 mm) B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9

Conveyor width B [mm] 400 400 400 500 500 500 600 600 600

Belt incline a 30° 45° 60° 30° 45° 60° 30° 45° 60°

Belt Conveyors 77
 KFG-P 2000

Stand Type ECO

The stand was developed specially for the incline
2 conveyor belt and incline conveyor modular belt
and is characterised by its simplicity and light-
weight design with the mk 2040.40 profile.

Infeed End Stand B67.06.014

The swivel casters used have a total locking device,

which guarantees a secure footing even at high Infeed height (ELH) = 166–349 mm
transport speeds. The height and width of the
stand is adapted based on the configuration; see
the order example on the right.

Infeed height (ELH) = 350–500 mm

Discharge End Stand B67.06.015

ELH = infeed height

ALH = discharge height
B = conveyor width
H = stand height
L = length of the vertical profile
AW = distance from the angle to the profile edge

78 Belt Conveyors
Side Rails Item no. B17.00.035

Side Rail KFG-P 2000

The side rail shown is our standard version
51,5
2
10
and is available with rapid delivery times.

It provides an optimal seal between the belt

and conveyor frame and prevents the loss

75
of conveyed product and operating malfunc-
tions.

Height 75 mm,
others on request
8

Sample order Type designation

KFG-P 2000 type S (B20.00.010) L3

Drive AF, 90° motor orientation (as displayed) Type S a2 L2

Speed of 15 m/min
L1
a1
Conveyor width B = 500 mm

Conveyor length L1 = 500 mm; L3

Type K
L2 = 1000 mm; L3 = 600 mm
a2
Belt incline a 1 = 60°; belt incline a 2 = 60° L2

Cleat type T20 with side rail B17.00.035

Stand, incline conveyor, type ECO Type L

L2
Infeed height ELH = 200 mm
L1
a1
Discharge height ALH = 1200 mm

Belt Conveyors 79
 Curved Belt Conveyor KGF-P 2040

» For horizontal material

flows around curves. «

The KGF-P 2040 conveyor system is based on

Series 40 profiles and is compatible with all mk
conveyor systems. The system slots running
along the outer radius (10 mm slot width based
on our profile technology) allow you to easily
connect additional accessories such as side
rails, sensors, and so on. The profile design
provides a torsion-resistant structure with
good load-bearing properties. The values for
the total load, speeds, and so on, specified be-
low are directly related to this design and may
vary as a result.

The conveyor is equipped with a ø 20 rolling

knife edge that allows even small products to
be reliably transferred to the next system. Belt
tensioning is handled by an automatic tensio-
ning device that is integrated in the tail, which
keeps the conveyor’s outer dimensions con-
stant. For variants with a standard motor, the
compact lower belt drive ensures that there are
no obstructing edges.

80 Belt Conveyors
 2

Benefits of the KGF-P 2040

Horizontal transport on a 90° and 180° curve

Compatible with all mk conveyor systems
 20 rolling knife edge ensures reliable transport
ø
of small product
I ntegrated tensioning mechanism that automati-
cally tensions the belt
Lower belt drive leaves no obstructing edges
 lexible operation in reverse and accumulation
F
modes

Cross Section
B ≙ conveyor width
usable width B-100

Profile mk 2040.21

Profile mk 2040.01

Belt Conveyors 81
 KGF-P 2040 BC

Properties
With this conveyor, mk offers the BC drive version with a usable width of 300, 400, 500 and 600 mm for
2 90° and 180° conveying radii. The compact conveyor frame design makes it easier to integrate the con­
veyor into existing systems. The ø 55 mm driving roller ensures excellent transmission of the motor power.

B20.40.020 for 90° Curve, B20.40.021 for 180° Curve

Technical data
Conveying angle 90° and 180°, others on request

Usable width B 300 with Ra=600 mm, Ri=300 mm, FB=706

400 with Ra=900 mm, Ri=500 mm, FB=1006
500 at Ra=900 mm, Ri=400 mm, FB=1006
600 at Ra=900 mm, Ri=300 mm, FB=1006

Drive location below

Drive and speed 5 to 30 m/min in Rm, others on request

Stands standard design or with belt replacement aid

Load capacity depending on conveyor radius and conveyed product, up to 30 kg

Belts from p. 88

82 Belt Conveyors
KGF-P 2040 Stands and Specifications

Radius of 90° Curve Versions Radius of 180° Curve Versions

B20.40.020 B20.40.021

Sample order Type designation

KGF-P 2040 Type 1 Type 2

Ra 900/Ri 500 version Standard stand Stand with

belt replacement aid*
Speed of 15 m/min

Conveyor width B = 400 mm

Belt type

Stand, with or without

belt replacement support

Conveyor height H = 800 mm

*With usable width
B = 400 mm or wider

Belt Conveyors 83
 DGF-P 2001 Double Belt Conveyor

» Double-line belt
conveyor system for
transporting pallets. «
The DGF-P 2001 transport system is specially
designed for transporting pallets. The system is
often used in assembly systems, for example, in
the electrical industry.

The small idler roller allows you to transport

short pallets. A roller on the lower run side of
the tail is responsible for the belt tension. This
ensures that the conveyor maintains a fixed
installation length. The belt runs entirely atop
wear strips, which allows for a maximum weight
of 15 kg per section.

mk delivers pallets for the DGF-P 2001 in alu­

minium as standard. The pallets can therefore
be machined according to customer require-
ments.

84 Belt Conveyors
 2

Benefits of the DGF-P 2001

Transporting pallets
 ery small tail allows even small pallets
V
to be transported
I ntegrated tensioning mechanism that
automatically tensions the belt
 lexible operation in reverse, accumulated
F
and cycling mode
Optional custom pallets

Cross Section
B ≙ conveyor width
usable width B-18

Profile mk 2001
Wear strip mk 1005
Profile mk 2000

Belt Conveyors 85
 DGF-P 2001

Properties
The compact conveyor frame design makes it easier to integrate the conveyor into existing systems.
2 The ø 58 mm driving roller ensures excellent transmission of the motor power.

B20.11.701

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 300 to 2000 mm

Conveyor width B 100, 125, 150, 175, 200 and 250 mm

Belt width 18 mm
(Preferred belt: GU-T0105-003BL, GU-U0306-017WE)

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath,

infeed on request

Drive and speed up to v=15 m/min, constant or controllable speed

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 15 kg, higher on request

Standard distributed load up to 10 kg/m, higher on request

86 Belt Conveyors
DGF-P 2001
Pallets
2
The pallets for the DGF-P 2001 transport system
are made from aluminium (3.1325) as standard.
The pallet width is always determined by the
dimensions of the conveyor system (B-11 mm).
The minimum length is 90 mm. Alternative pallet
materials can also be used depending on the
product to be transported.

Processing
Upon request, we are happy to design pallets for
your particular application or manufacture them
according to your drawings.

Belt Conveyors 87
 Belts

General Information
2 For the most part, the belt types listed here meet The non-accumulating belts, also known as anti-
all requirements. Other belts are available on slip belts, have a structure or friction coefficient
request. that provides high grip.

Accumulating belts are designed for long-term Continuous

accumulated operation and have corresponding operation
surface properties (friction coefficient).

Belts with limited accumulation capability are not

designed for long-term accumulated operation.
Relative motion is permitted, e.g. when running up Accumulated
against an end stop, in case of slight speed differ­ operation
ences from one conveyor to the next, or with trans-
verse movement of light loads (with laterally stiff
belts only).

Order designation
 GU -U 03 03 -001 WE
Transport medium GU = belt
Material, carrying side of the transport medium
Surface condition
K1% value* rounded to 0 decimal places
Consecutive mk number
Colour, carrying side

Material Surface condition Colour, carrying side **

-F Felt 01 Allows for accumulated operation BL Transparent

-R Rubber (NBR) 02 Allows for restricted accumulated operation WE White

-T Polyester (PET) 03 Not suitable for accumulated operation LB Blue

-U Polyurethane (PU) DG Green

-V Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) SW Black

* The K1% value is the force with which the belt is stretched by 1% per mm of width.
It is an indication of the strength and therefore the load capacity of the belt.
** Depending on the batch, the colour of the belt may differ from the example in the photograph
in this catalogue.

88 Belt Conveyors
Belts

Belt group ascending in price

Item no. and Allows for Material Colour Surface Min. Perm. Approx. Properties Belt
designation accumulated ø of the temper- belt group
operation tail ature thickness

K1029003 | GU-T0105-003BL
2
Yes PET Trans- Woven 6 mm -10 to 1.2 Laterally stiff, 2
parent 70 °C mm antistatic,
FDA-compliant,
oil-resistant*

K1029008 | GU-T0101-008BL
Yes PET Trans- Woven 20 mm -10 to 1.3 Antistatic, FDA 2
parent 70 °C mm compliant, suit­
able for curved
belt conveyors

K1029028 | GU-V0106-028DG
Yes PVC Green Smooth 14 mm -15 to 1.8 Laterally stiff, 2
80 °C mm FDA compliant,
suitable for in-
cline conveyor

K1029015 | GU-U0107-015DG
Yes PU Green Smooth 40 mm -10 to 1.6 Laterally stiff, 3
70 °C mm antistatic,
oil-resistant*

K1029010 | GU-V0103-010SW
Yes PVC Black Smooth 30 mm -10 to 1.8 Antistatic, 2
60 °C mm suitable for
curved belt
conveyor

K1029019 | GU-F0106-019SW
Yes Felt Black Smooth 30 mm -10 to 2.5 Antistatic, 2
120 °C mm suitable for
curved belt
conveyor

K1029007 | GU-U0204-007WE
With PU White Smooth 6 mm -30 to 1.3 Laterally stiff, 3
restrictions 100 °C mm antistatic,
FDA compliant,
oil-resistant*

K1029050 | GU-U0205-050LB
With PU Blue Smooth 6 mm -30 to 1.3 Laterally stiff, 3
restrictions 100 °C mm antistatic,
FDA-compliant,
oil-resistant*

Belt Conveyors 89
 Belts

Belt group ascending in price

Item no. and Allows for Material Colour Surface Min. Perm. Approx. Properties Belt
designation accumulated ø of the temper- belt group
operation tail ature thickness
2 K1029006 | GU-V0203-006DG single-layer***
With PVC Green Smooth 30 mm -10 to 0.8 Laterally stiff, 1
restrictions 70 °C mm antistatic

K1029011 | GU-U0205-011DG
With PU Green Smooth 50 mm -15 to 1.6 Laterally stiff, 4
restrictions 80 °C mm antistatic,
FDA-compliant,
oil-resistant*

K1029029 | GU-U0310-029DG
No PU Green Smooth 50 mm -30 to 2.4 Laterally stiff, 4
90 °C mm FDA compliant,
suitable for in-
cline conveyor,
oil-resistant*
K1029001 | GU-U0302-001WE single-layer***
No PU White Smooth 6 mm -20 to 0.7 Antistatic, 1
70 °C mm FDA-compliant,
oil-resistant*

K1029004 | GU-U0305-004WE
No PU White Smooth 6 mm -30 to 1.2 Laterally stiff, 3
80 °C mm antistatic,
FDA-compliant,
oil-resistant*

K1029017 | GU-U0306-017WE
No PU White Smooth 10 mm -30 to 1.4 Laterally stiff, 3
80 °C mm antistatic,
FDA-compliant,
oil-resistant*

K1029030 | GU-U0308-030LB
No PU Blue Smooth 6 mm -30 to 1.4 Laterally stiff, 3
100 °C mm antistatic,
FDA-compliant,
oil-resistant*

K1029024 | GU-U0305-024LB
No PU Blue Smooth 6 mm -30 to 1.5 Laterally stiff, 3
100 °C mm antistatic,
FDA-compliant,
oil-resistant*

90 Belt Conveyors
Belts

Belt group ascending in price

Item no. and Allows for Material Colour Surface Min. Perm. Approx. Properties Belt
designation accumulated ø of the temper- belt group
operation tail ature thickness

K1029012 | GU-U0306-012DG
2
No PU Green Smooth 25 mm -30 to 1.4 Laterally stiff, 3
100 °C mm antistatic,
FDA-compliant,
oil-resistant*

K1029009 | GU-V0303-009DG
No PVC Green Smooth 25 mm -10 to 1.8 Antistatic, 2
70 °C mm suitable for
curved belt
conveyor

K1029013 | GU-V0307-013DG
No PVC Green Smooth 40 mm -10 to 2.0 Laterally stiff, 2
60 °C mm antistatic

K1029005 | GU-R0303-005DG
No NBR Green Woven 30 mm 0 to 1.5 Antistatic, 3
80 °C mm oil-resistant*,
cut-proof

K1029016 | GU-U0305-016DG
No PU Green Structu- 40 mm -30 to 80 1.9 Antistatic, 4
red °C mm oil-resistant*

K1029014 | GU-V0306-014DG
No PVC Green Structu- 50 mm -10 to 4.9 Laterally stiff, 3
red 60 °C mm antistatic

K1029018 | GU-V0307-018SW
No PVC Black Structu- 40 mm -10 to 2.2 Laterally stiff, 2
red 60 °C mm antistatic

* The belt’s oil resistance may need to be tested based on the type of oil used.
** Cut-proof belts ensure a longer service life when transporting sharp products such as stamped parts.
*** Single-layer belts are less robust and therefore must not be as strongly pre-tensioned.

Belt Conveyors 91
 Cleats and Side Walls

When selecting a cleat profile, please note that Longitudinal cleats, internal (running side)
the cleat must be of the same material as the belt. are a belt guide option and are usually used where
Interrupted transverse cleats are possible, as are lateral forces act on the belt. In the area of the
2 combinations of longitudinal and transverse cleats. longitudinal cleats, the belt may be uneven.
The distance from the cleats to the edge of the belt
must be at least 2 mm.

The bonding points on the cleats generally have

more limited temperature range than the belt and
clean material itself.

Cleat material Temperature range

PVC -10 to +70°C

PU -30 to +80°C

PE -30 to +100°C

Transverse cleats (carrying side)

Side walls, external (carrying side)
serve as the carrying mechanism for the conveyed
can be used instead of side rails and are often
product, especially in inclined conveyors.
employed in incline conveyors.

Longitudinal cleats, external (carrying side)

are used to guide the belt on concave tracks
(for example, on incline conveyors).

92 Belt Conveyors
Cleats and Side Walls

Longitudinal Cleats (can also be used as lateral cleats)

Designation Material/colour Min. Min. ø of idler roller [mm]
PVC PU SA/SA1* Weight Longitudinal cleats Transverse 2
cleats
Trans- Running Carrying
Green White Green [mm] [g/m] Carrying side
parent side side
K6 • • • 30 25 40 30 30

K10** • • • • 30 60 70 60 50

K13 • • • 30 100 90 60 80

K15 • • 30 120 90 60 90

K17 • • • 30 180 90 90 100

F20/3 • • 30 75 70 50 70

F30/8 • • 45 290 120 90 120

*SA1 = minimum distance between longitudinal cleats/SA = minimum distance between transverse cleats
**This cleat must be used for the belt guide on the carrying side for the incline conveyor.

Belt Conveyors 93
 Cleats and Side Walls

Transverse Cleats
Designation Min. Material/colour Min. ø of
2 SA* idler roller [mm]
PVC PU Weight Transverse cleats
Green White Green White [g/m] carrying side

T20U 40 • • 140 50

T30U 40 • • 180 50

T35U 40 • • 200 50

T40U 40 • • 220 50

T50U 40 • • 250 50

T60U 40 • • 280 50

T20 55 • • 160 90

94 Belt Conveyors
Cleats and Side Walls

Transverse Cleats
Designation Min. Material/colour Min. ø of
SA* idler roller [mm] 2
PVC PU Weight Transverse cleats,
Green White Green White [g/m] carrying side

L40 55 • • 140 85

L60 55 • • 180 85

*SA = minimum distance between transverse cleats

Side Walls
Designation Material/colour Min. ø
PVC PU of idler roller [mm]
Green White Blue Green White Blue (≙ 2 x side wall height)

WK20
20
P=25
• • • • • • 40

25

WK25
25
P=25
• • • • • • 50

25

WK30
30
P=25
• • • • • • 60

25

WK35
35
P=25
• • • • • • 70

25

WK40
40
P=25/30*
• • • • • • 80

25/36*

The minimum distance from the side wall to the edge of the belt is 5 mm. Min. SA1 = 60; min. A = 5
*Varies based on the version

Belt Conveyors 95
 Application Examples

GUF-P MINI with lower belt drive BC for integration

into an existing system with adjustable side rail

GUF-P MINI with head drive AF as incline conveyor

type L, for transporting parts to a lower transport level

96 Belt Conveyors
 2

GUF-P MINI with lower belt drive BC as special configuration with 5 conveying lines.
The inner conveying lines can be moved manually and are guided by guide rods

GUF-P MINI with lower belt drive BC GUF-P MINI with single-belt stand and drip pan
as inclined conveyor, stand system 53.12 below the motor for slightly oily stamped parts

Belt Conveyors 97
 Application Examples

GUF-P 2000 with AC head drive and multi-track

side rail as separator conveyor, complete with drip pan

Telescopic GUF-P 2000, infeed can be extended Mobile GUF-P 2000 with removal
using recirculating ball bearing guide chute with variable incline angle

98 Belt Conveyors
 2

GUF-P 2000 with mechanism for folding and

setting up paper bags upstream of the filling process

GUF-P 2000 for connecting rods GUF-P 2000 as cross conveyor and separator
with pneumatic positioning station downstream from a cooling line

Belt Conveyors 99
 Application Examples

GUF-P 2000 can be moved on track roller assembly,

with manual swivelling belt infeed

GUF-P 2000 with head drive AC with wire mesh belt Belt conveyor GUF-P 2045 with low installation
for conveyed goods at up to 150° C height integrated into blister packing system

100 Belt Conveyors

 2

GUF-P 2000 as cross GUF-P 2000 with integrated adjusting unit (VST 2011)
conveyor and separator for height adjustment of the wiper brushes

GUF-P 2000 as a conveyor belt for GUF-P 2000 with rolling knife edge and
serial packers with a heat sealing station for separator conveyor with head drive AF
producing custom shipping bags

Belt Conveyors 101

 Application Examples

Combination of INOX belt conveyor and angled belt conveyor

for transport of praline balls with granulate

INOX vacuum belt conveyor with INOX vacuum belt conveyor

connections for vacuum pump with custom side rail

102 Belt Conveyors

 2

INOX belt conveyor with rolling blade edge for the

transfer/handling of small transport goods

INOX belt conveyor with adjustable side rail INOX belt conveyor with head drive AF

Belt Conveyors 103

 Application Examples

GUF-P 2041 with protective tunnel

as discharge belt for rear axle parts

GUF-P 2041 with pneumatic diverter GUF-P 2041 with adjustable side rail

104 Belt Conveyors

 2

GUF-P 2041 with lower belt drive BC; the height of

the frame can be adjusted using a hydraulic pump

GUF-P 2041 with head drive AC and 90 Two GUF-P 2041 units in tandem arrangement with
watt fans in the conveyor frame, reglomat mobile stand system for mobile dual system supply
mounted on top of the conveyor frame

Belt Conveyors 105

 Application Examples

GUF-P 2041 with a special design as a

vacuum conveyor for offset pressure plates

GUF-P 2041, head drive AC with GUF-P 2041 upward offset AC head drive
support pan and transverse cleats with belt slide bed on both sides
and front side wiper on the discharge

106 Belt Conveyors

 2

Circulation system for manually sorting laundry based on

GUF-P 2041 and GUF-P 2000 conveyors with AC head drive

C-frame with recirculating ball bearing guides, GUF-P 2004 with head drive AS fitted
each with 2 roller carriages for lifting or lowering laterally on the outside as a two-level conveyor
the GUF-P 2004 conveyors with drip pans on a shared base frame

Belt Conveyors 107

 Application Examples

GUF-P 2004 with lateral outer AS head drive

and robust special belt for punch scrap

GUF-P 2004 with head drive AC Belt conveyor combination of GUF-P 2004
and transverse cleats with drum motor CA and dual line KTF-P 2004

108 Belt Conveyors

 2

GUF-P 2004 designed with maximum width B=2 m

GUF-P 2004 with divided upper run and lower run GUF-P 2004 can serve as a transport guide
for reversing vehicles; the carrying side of the
belt is divided into numbered sections

Belt Conveyors 109

 Application Examples

KFG-P 2000 with side wall for

lateral boundaries and transverse cleats

KFG-P 2000 with head drive AU and 45° incline KFG-P 2000 ECO with head drive AF and 60°
incline variant B3 (B20.00.015-B3)

110 Belt Conveyors

 2

KFG-P 2000 with head drive AF and transverse cleats

Mobile KFG-P 2000, type K with side rail SF 9.1 KFG-P 2000 with head drive AC with side rail SF 8.1,
(VA sheet steel, tilted) and transfer hopper at the belt guide on both sides via longitudinal cleats K10
beginning of the conveyor, including controller

Belt Conveyors 111

 Application Examples

KGF-P 2040 with lower belt drive BI and hydraulic

adjustment of the stand height using a hand crank

Combination of 90° and 180° KGF-P 2040 curved Transfer between KGF-P 2040 and GUF-P 2041
belt conveyors with lower belt drive BI, reversible with rolling knife edge for conveyed
products starting at a length of 50 mm

112 Belt Conveyors

 2

KGF-P 2040 with lower belt drive BI and rotating 180° KGF-P 2040 with side rail
wiper brush underneath the conveyor (return)

KGF-P 2040 with rollers for transfers 180° KGF-P 2040 with fully closed
to the belt conveyor without a knife edge cover and 0 mm inner radius

Belt Conveyors 113

 Application Examples

DGF-P 2001 with lower belt drive BC

Pallet circulation from the conveyor DGF-P 2001, integrated

lift-and-transfer conveyor with round belt or separating pallets

114 Belt Conveyors

 2

GUF-P 2000 double-line conveyor; the clearance

between the belts allows for access from below

DGF-P 2001 with side rail DGF-P 2001 with lower belt drive BC
for over-wide conveyed goods

Belt Conveyors 115

 Chapter 3 Modular Belt Conveyors

Selecting a Modular Modular Belt Conveyor Incline Conveyor

Belt Conveyor 118 MBF-P 2040 120 Modular Belt KFM-P 2040 124
Head Drives 122 Head Drives 126
Stands128

Curved Modular Belt Incline Conveyor Hinged Modular Belts

Conveyor KMF-P 2040 130 Plate Belt KFS-P 2040.86 136
For MBF-P 2040 142
Head Drives 134 Head Drives 138 For KMF-P 2040 144
Stands140 For KFS-P 2040.86 145
Side Rails 141

116 Modular Belt Conveyors

 3

Application Examples 146

Modular Belt Conveyors 117

 Selecting a Modular Belt Conveyor

Dimensions – Technical Data

Conveyor Conveyor Conveyor Total load* Speed ø of tails Reverse Accumu- Cycling
system widths lengths as standard, up to [mm] operation lated operation
[mm] [mm] up to [kg] [m/min] operation

Modular Belt Conveyors

3 MBF-P 2040 approx. 200–1000 475–10000 250 30 approx. 100 • •
Incline conveyor modular belt
KFM-P 2040 approx. 200–1000 1000–4000 100 30 approx. 100 •
Incline conveyor, hinged plate belt
KFS-P 2040.86 210–710 1400–10000 150 12 150 •
*Maximum load that is transported by the system in question with a standard configuration and for a standard application.
The permissible load depends on the width, number of teeth, drive sprocket wheels, chain type, load distribution, operating mode
and environmental influences.

System Selection
... based on the Load, Conveyor Width and Chain Series
The diagram can be used as a basis for determining the permissible total load based on the conveyor width
and chain series. For the plastic modular belts, a coefficient of friction of µ=0.3 is assumed. For the steel
chain (hinged plate belt), a coefficient of friction of µ=0.15 is assumed.
For accumulated operation, the mass that accumulates must also be taken into account with µ=0.3 for the
total load. Theoretically, this means that the mass in accumulated operation must be doubled (200 kg in
accumulated operation equals 400 kg in continuous operation). The standard application with lateral cleats,
particularly with incline conveyors, does not allow accumulated operation.

Total load [kg]

SK1*
(steel chain) Series 8 POM (straight)
350

300
Series 10 POM (straight)
250
Series 8 PP (straight)
200
Series 10 PP
(straight)
150
ASB 2.2
(curve)
100

50
Series 8 POM
(Incline of 30°/45°/60°)
0
0 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 ... 1.000
Width [mm]
*The total load for the steel chain is the sum of the payload and the weight of the chain itself.

118 Modular Belt Conveyors

Application Options
Due to their positive locking drive in the side rail, modular conveyors are recommended where a belt is not
an option due to slip, an unfavourable length-width ratio or transverse forces. The low-maintenance plastic
modular belts in Series 8 and 10 (straight) and ASB 2.2 (curve) are standard versions.

Upon request, we can provide a design with reinforced bearings, supplemental supports of the drive shaft 3
and an appropriate number of additional sprockets to utilise the full performance capacity of the chain
and, following testing and coordination, enable widths of up to 2 m.

The hinged plate belt for the incline conveyor is equipped with a steel chain that makes it suitable for
harsh environmental conditions and for transporting products such as stamped, cast, forged or wooden
pieces. It is particularly suitable for conveying hot goods up to 200° C and can also be configured as a
straight section (type G).

On request, transverse cleats can be screwed or welded on. Stainless steel or perforated variants of the
chain are available. Due to the gap of 1 to 3 mm between the side rail and chain, this system is not suitable
for pointed stamping scraps or metal chips.

Modular Belts
Series 8 is characterised by its robustness and is used in industrial applications in particular. Series 10 is
intended for transporting lightweight to medium-weight products in sanitary environments, such as those
found in the food industry and the pharmaceutical sector. The module geometry and the sprocket wheels
were therefore designed to ensure easy cleaning, to eliminate cavities and hollow spaces and to allow for
limited self-cleaning of the gaps.

Transverse cleats up to 75 mm in height and side plates up to 100 mm in height are available for both
series. This eliminates the need for a complex side rail, as well as the associated problems arising from
gaps and from relative motion between the chain and side rail.

For the permissible tensile load, a safety factor of three relative to the permissible tensile loads of the
chain was included in the calculation to ensure reliable durability. At a length of 3 metres, the usual chain
slack can be dispensed with, which allows for restricted reversing operations. At lengths of more than
3 metres or under heavy loads, the conveyor is run with a balance option.

The chain for curves (ASB 2.2) is highly resistant to wear and abrasion, making it suitable for high
temperatures, contact with chemicals or food, etc.

Chain material
The Series 8 chain made from impact-resistant, affordable polypropylene (PP) is the standard for
industrial applications. Series 10 is made from polyethylene (PE) for applications in the food industry.

For especially demanding requirements regarding max. load and/or cut resistance, we recommend
polyoxymethylene (POM, POM-CR). This material can even handle the occasional impact from product
landing forcefully on the chain or the transverse cleats.

Modular Belt Conveyors 119

 Modular Belt Conveyor MBF-P 2040

»flexible
Straight version for
combination with
curved and inclined tracks. «
The positive drive mechanism on the conveyor
system MBF-P 2040 with modular belt allows
it to convey high loads even with narrower con-
veyor widths. The belt guide ensures that there
is no lateral movement. It also allows conveyed
products to be moved diagonally.

The material of the modular belt offers a high

level of wear-resistance and abrasion resis­
tance. The conveyor system offers various
chain materials to make it suitable for food,
suitable for high temperatures or resistant to
chemicals. Accessories such as side plates
and transverse cleat profiles are also included
in the product range.

Maintenance work such as tensioning the belt

or replacing individual elements can be carried
out quickly and easily.

120 Modular Belt Conveyors

 3
Benefits of the MBF-P 2040

High load capacities available

 ositive drive mechanism eliminates slippage
P
and makes it suitable for wet applications
 table chain travel regardless of the length/
S
width ratio
Maximum usable width with low total width
L ateral movement of conveyed products
Belt is guided to eliminate lateral deviation
 hain material is highly resistant to wear and
C
abrasion, making it suitable for high tempera­
tures, contact with chemicals or food, etc.

Cross Section*
B ≙ conveyor width
KB ≙ chain width

Profile mk 2040.41

Wear strip mk 1040.16

*Diagram includes a modular belt support in the lower run

(dashed line). Only necessary with B > 700 mm.

Modular Belt Conveyors 121

 MBF-P 2040 AC

Properties
The compact conveyor frame design makes it easier to integrate the conveyor into existing systems. The
sprocket wheel with the positive-locked connection to the modular belt ensures excellent transmission
of the motor power. At lengths of up to three metres, the chain does not sag but the belt still runs quietly.
With lengths of around three metres or more, there is chain sagging on the drive end, which is enclosed by
3 a protective box. This results in an additional obstructing edge.

B20.40.806

L B+56

ø(D W) ø(D W) B

300
30
46

min. 325,5
B+30
B

min. 75

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 475 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B approx. 200–1000 mm depending on the chain type p. 142

Drive location left/right underneath

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stands from p. 280

Standard total load up to 250 kg p. 118

Standard distributed load up to 75 kg p. 118

Pitch diameter (DP) chain S8=99.7 mm; chain S10=98 mm

122 Modular Belt Conveyors

MBF-P 2040 AS

Properties
The drive located laterally on the outside allows the total height of the conveyor to be restricted to a mini-
mum. The sprocket wheel with the positive-locked connection to the modular belt ensures excellent trans-
mission of the motor power. With lengths of up to three metres, the chain does not sag but the belt still
runs quietly. With lengths of around three metres or more, there is chain sagging on the drive end, which
is enclosed by a protective box. This results in an additional obstructing edge. 3

B20.40.807
L B+70
ø(D W) ø(D W) B

312

B+30
B

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 610 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B approx. 200–1000 mm depending on the chain type p. 142

Drive location left/right underneath

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stands from p. 280

Standard total load up to 250 kg p. 118

Standard distributed load up to 75 kg p. 118

Pitch diameter (DP) chain S8=99.7 mm; chain S10=98 mm

Modular Belt Conveyors 123

 KFM-P 2040 Incline Conveyor Modular Belt

3
» Vertical transport
for connecting
different heights. «

The conveyor system KFM-P 2040, with its com-

pact conveyor frame structure made from alu­
minium profile technology, is ideal for integration
into existing machines or as a mobile transport
unit for filling containers, for example.

The plastic modular belt, which is fully guided

through PE1000 wear strips, is used to transport
slugs or moulded plastic parts, light punched
parts or food products. The material of the mod­
ular belt offers a high level of wear-resistance
and abrasion resistance. The conveyor system
offers various chain materials to make it suitable
for food, suitable for high temperatures or resis­
tant to chemicals.

Accessories such as side plates and transverse

cleat profiles are also included in the product
range. The slots in the profiles allow for easy
connection of accessories such as funnels and
discharge slides. Depending on the project you
wish to convey, please also see our incline con-
veyor with a belt or hinged plate belt.

124 Modular Belt Conveyors

Benefits of the KFM-P 2040 3

Moving transport unit for mobile use

Ideal for integration into existing systems
High load capacities available
 ositive drive mechanism eliminates slippage
P
and makes it suitable for wet applications
 table chain travel regardless of the length/
S
width ratio
 hain material is highly resistant to wear and
C
abrasion, making it suitable for high tempera-
tures, contact with chemicals or food, etc.
 ccessories such as side boards and trans­
A
verse cleat profiles available

Cross Section
B ≙ conveyor width
KB ≙ chain width
NB ≙ usable width

Profile mk 2040.41

Wear strip mk 1040.17

Modular Belt Conveyors 125

 KFM-P 2040 AC

Properties
For the drive version AC, mk offers a multitude of drive motors tailored to various speed and load capacity
requirements. The sprocket wheels ensure excellent transmission of the motor power. At lengths of up
to three metres, the chain does not sag but the belt still runs quietly. With lengths of around three metres
or more, there is chain sagging on the drive end, which is enclosed by a protective box. This results in an
3 additional obstructing edge.

Type S: B20.40.810, type K: B20.40.811, type L: B20.40.812

L3

25,4
1 R315

300
ø(D W) L2 B
36

L1 min. = 400
ø(D W)
H

L2 min. = 330 R200

L3 min. = 350 L1

Lp

Technical data
Conveyor length L (L1+L2+L3) depending on the belt shape and load,
usually up to 4000, max. 10000 mm
(max. length based on the angle of alpha and L2)

Conveyor width B approx. 200–1000 mm depending on the chain type p. 142

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath/above

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stands p. 128

Total load up to 100 kg (including chain weight) p. 118

Distributed load up to 50 kg/m, 15 kg/compartment p. 118

Belt incline a 1 and 2 30, 45 and 60° others on

request

Pitch diameter (DP) chain S8=99.7 mm; chain S10=98 mm

126 Modular Belt Conveyors

KFM-P 2040 AS

Properties
The drive positioned laterally on the outside allows the total height of the conveyor to be restricted to a
minimum. The sprocket wheel with the positive-locked connection to the modular belt ensures excellent
transmission of the motor power. At lengths of up to three metres, the chain does not sag but the belt still
runs quietly. With lengths of around three metres or more, there is chain sagging on the drive end, which
is enclosed by a protective box. This results in an additional obstructing edge. 3

Type S: B20.40.813, type K: B20.40.814, type L: B20.40.815

L3 1
R315

ø(D W) L2 B
60

L1 min. = 400
ø(D W)
H

L2 min. = 330 R200

L3 min. = 480 L1

Lp

Technical data
Conveyor length L (L1+L2+L3) depending on the belt shape and load,
usually up to 4000, max. 10000 mm
(max. length based on the angle of alpha and L2)

Conveyor width B approx. 200–1000 mm depending on the chain type p. 142

Drive location discharge end left/right

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stands p. 128

Total load up to 100 kg (including chain weight) p. 118

Distributed load up to 50 kg/m, 15 kg/compartment p. 118

Belt incline a 1 and 2 30, 45 and 60° others on

request

Pitch diameter (DP) chain S8=99.7 mm; chain S10=98 mm

Modular Belt Conveyors 127

 KFM-P 2040

Stand Type ECO

The stand was developed specially for the incline
conveyor belt and incline conveyor modular belt
and is characterised by its simplicity and light-
weight design with the mk 2040.40 profile.
3

Infeed End Stand B67.06.014

The swivel casters used have a total locking device,

which guarantees a secure footing even at high Infeed height (ELH) = 166–349 mm
transport speeds. The height and width of the
stand is adapted based on the configuration; see
the order example on the right.

Infeed height (ELH) = 350–500 mm

Discharge End Stand B67.06.015

ELH = infeed height

ALH = discharge height
B = conveyor width
H = stand height
L = length of the vertical profile
AW = distance from the angle to the profile edge

128 Modular Belt Conveyors

Sample order Type designation
KFM-P 2040 type S (B20.40.810) Drive AC AS

Drive AC, 0° motor orientation (as shown) Type S L3 B20.40. ... 810 813
a2
Speed of 15 m/min L2

L1
3
Conveyor width B = 460 mm a1

Conveyor length
Type K B20.40. ... 811 814
L1 = 500 mm; L2 = 1000 mm; L3 = 600 mm L3
a2
Belt incline a 1 = 60°; belt incline a 2 = 60°
L2
Cam height H1/S8 = 25.4 mm (see page 127)

Stand, incline conveyor, type ECO Type L B20.40. ... 812 815

Infeed height ELH = 200 mm L2

L1
Discharge height ALH = 1200 mm a1

Modular Belt Conveyors 129

 Curved Modular Belt Conveyor KMF-P 2040

» A variety of track
layouts with just one drive. «
The curved modular belt conveyor KMF-P 2040
is the curved version of this conveyor type. The
curve is available with different track layouts
(L/S/U) and curve angles of 45° and 90°.

The conveyors range in width from 164 mm

to 1005 mm and offer excellent usable width
ratios, which is important if space is limited
at your facility. They can be combined with
straight sections (MBF-P 2040) and vertical
inclines (KFM-P 2040) to adapt the track layout
to your existing production conditions and
create virtually any three-dimensional configu-
ration.

Modular belt conveyors are extremely robust

and can be used in a multitude of ways for
almost every transport application. The belts
are wear resistant and can even be used to
transport goods with sharp edges or to trans-
port goods in harsh application environments.
The conveyor system also offers various chain
materials to make it suitable for food, suitable
for high temperatures or resistant to chemi-
cals.

130 Modular Belt Conveyors

 3

Benefits of the KMF-P 2040

High load capacities available

 ositive drive mechanism eliminates slippage
P
and makes it suitable for wet applications
Maximum usable width with low total width
L ateral movement of conveyed products
 hain material is highly resistant to wear and
C
abrasion, making it suitable for high tempera­
tures, contact with chemicals or food, etc.
 ariable track layouts with just a single drive,
V
different speeds at no additional cost

Cross Section
B ≙ conveyor width
KB ≙ chain width
NB ≙ usable width

Wear strip mk 2040.17

Profile mk 2040.80

Modular Belt Conveyors 131

 KMF-P 2040

Properties
The curved modular belt conveyor KMF-P 2040 has a modular design and, with just one drive for complex
track layouts, is extremely efficient. At lengths of up to three metres, the chain does not sag but the belt
still runs quietly. With lengths of around three metres or more, there is chain sagging on the drive end,
which is enclosed by a protective box. This results in an additional obstructing edge.
3

L2
α

Ri
L1

Technical data
Curve angle a 45° and 90° (in combination, also 135° and 180°)

Drive head drives AC, AF and AS

Speed 5 to 30 m/min

Load capacity depending on the track layout, conveyor length and conveyor width,
up to 150 kg. Higher on request.

Cleats and side plates the chain can be fitted with optional transverse cleats
and side plates with H = 25 mm.

132 Modular Belt Conveyors

KMF-P 2040 Variants

Curve L45° Curve L90° Curve L135°

(also available as L180°)
L2 L2 L2
α

ß
3
L1

200
Ri

Ri Ri

B
Ri
L1

L1

B
Examples of a Track Layout
Track S Track U
ß
L2

L2
R
i
R

L3
i
α

L3

Ri
Ri

α
L1

L1

Dimensions [mm] only for L45° or L90°

Conveyor width (B) 164 241 317 394 470 546 623 699 776 852 928 1005
Chain width (KB) 149 226 302 379 455 531 608 684 761 837 913 990
Usable width (NB) 134 211 287 364 435 511 588 664 741 817 893 970
Length L1 (min.) 224 339 453 569 683 797 912 1026 1142 1256 1370 1485
Length L2 (min.) 645 645 645 758 910 1062 1216 1368 1522 1674 1826 1980

Length L3 Track S 400 452 604 758 910 1062 1216 1368 1522 1674 1826 1980
(min.) Track U 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
Inner radius (Ri) 324 493 660 830 997 1164 1334 1501 1670 1837 2005 2174

Modular Belt Conveyors 133

 KMF-P 2040 Drive Versions

Head drive AC Type L: B20.40.826 | Type S: B20.40.827 | Type U: B20.40.828

Properties Standard head drive.

B+56
Drive version with a variety of combi­-
nation options for motors, gearboxes
3
225

min. 400 and sprocket wheels.

Drive location discharge end left/right

Motor orientation 0°, 90°, 180°

Speed 5 to 30 m/min

Head drive AF Type L: B20.40.823 | Type S: B20.40.824 | Type U: B20.40.825

Properties Direct head drive.

min. B+160
Compact and low-maintenance drive
version with a motor that is fitted directly
on the drive shaft
225

Drive location discharge end left/right

Motor orientation 0°, 90° (front terminal box), 180°, 270°

Speed 5; 7; 10; 12.5; 17; 20.5; 26; 29.5 m/min

Head drive AS Type L: B20.40.820 | Type S: B20.40.821 | Type U: B20.40.822

Properties Compact head drive,

B+70 positioned laterally on the outside.

A drive version restricted to a minimum

225

total height with motor mounted on the

outside

Drive location discharge end left/right

Motor orientation 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°

Speed 5 to 30 m/min

134 Modular Belt Conveyors

Notes

Modular Belt Conveyors 135

 Incline Conveyor Hinged Plate Belt KFS-P 2040.86

3 » Hinged plate belt

with steel chain for
durable transport. «

With its compact conveyor frame made from

aluminium profile technology, the KFS-P 2040.86
conveyor system is ideally suited for demanding
continuous duty in multi-shift operation. The
hinged plate belt is fully guided through wear
strips and used for transporting stamped, cast,
forged and wooden parts. With a gap of 1 to
3 mm between the chain and the side rail, this
conveyor system is not suitable for pointed
stamping scraps or metal chips.

The particularly robust steel chain is also avail­

able in a stainless steel or perforated design on
request. It is suitable for transporting hot products.
The conveyor system’s modular design combined
with the general advantages of profile technology
make the conveyor excellently suited for integra­
tion into existing systems or for use as a mobile
transport unit, e.g. for filling containers.

The slots in the profiles allow for easy connection

of accessories such as side rails, stands, funnels
and discharge slides. The use of standard com-
ponents enables mk to achieve rapid delivery
times and an excellent price-performance ratio.
Custom solutions, such as special funnels, are
available on request. Depending on the project
you wish to convey, please also see our incline
conveyor with a belt or modular belt.

136 Modular Belt Conveyors

 3

Benefits of the KFS-P 2040.86

Vertical transport for connecting different heights

S table and heat-resistant surface
 or transporting stamped, cast, forged or wooden
F
parts and for hot product
High load capacities available
 ransverse cleats for transporting small pieces or
T
bulk product

Cross Section
B ≙ conveyor width
NB ≙ usable width
120

Wear strip mk 1040.07

Profile mk 2040.86

Modular Belt Conveyors 137

 KFS-P 2040.86 AC

Properties
For the drive version AC, mk offers a multitude of drive motors tailored to various speed and load capacity
requirements. The sprocket wheels ensure excellent transmission of the motor power.

Type S: B20.40.606, type K: B20.40.607, type L: B20.40.608, type G: B20.40.605

ø(D W)=87,8

Technical data
Conveyor length L (L1+L2+L3) depending on belt shape and load, up to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 210 to 710 mm (in 50 mm increments) others on

request

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath/above

Drive and speed up to 12 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 140

Total load up to 150 kg p. 118

Distributed load up to 50 kg/m, 15 kg/compartment p. 118

Belt incline a 1 and 2 15, 30, 45 and 60° others on

request

138 Modular Belt Conveyors

KFS-P 2040.86 AS

Properties
The drive positioned laterally on the outside allows the total height of the conveyor to be restricted to a
minimum. The sprocket wheel with the positive-locked connection to the modular belt ensures excellent
transmission of the motor power.

Type S: B20.40.610, type K: B20.40.611, type L: B20.40.612, type G: B20.40.609

ø(D W)=87,8

Technical data
Conveyor length L (L1+L2+L3) depending on belt shape and load, up to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 210 to 710 mm (in 50 mm increments) others on

request

Drive location discharge end left/right

Drive and speed up to 12 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 140

Total load up to 150 kg p. 118

Distributed load up to 50 kg/m, 15 kg/compartment p. 118

Belt incline a 1 and 2 15, 30, 45 and 60° others on

request

Modular Belt Conveyors 139

 KFS-P 2040.86

Stands
The stand type shown, stand type A, can be equipped
with all the pad options. All the stands in the
mk conveyor technology range can be used with
type G.
3
The swivel casters used in pad option 1 have a total
locking device and guarantee stability even at high
transport speeds.

They are available as ø 75 mm for x=113 mm,

ø 100 mm for x=140 mm and
ø 125 mm for x=165 mm.

Stand type A
Pad option 1

Pad option 2

Pad option 3

Sample order Type designation

KFS-P 2040.86 type S (B20.40.606) Drive AC AS

Drive AC 0° motor orientation (as shown) Type S L3 B20.40. ... 606 610
L2
Speed of 10 m/min a2 L1
a1
Conveyor width B = 460 mm
Type K L3 B20.40. ... 607 611
Conveyor length L2
a2
L1 = 500 mm; L2 = 1000 mm; L3 = 600 mm

Belt incline a 1 = 60°; belt incline a 2 = 60° Type L B20.40. ... 608 612
Cam height H1 = 20 mm (see page 133) L2
L1
a1
Stand type A, pad option 1, ø 75 mm roll
Type G B20.40. ... 605 609
Infeed height ELH = 200 mm L2
Discharge height ALH = 1200 mm

140 Modular Belt Conveyors

Side Rail SF 8.1 B17.00.026

The side rails shown are our standard

version and are available with rapid delivery

H=100
H=75
times.

They seal the gap (up to 1–3 mm) between 3

the chain and conveyor frame.

Height H=75 mm
Height H=100 mm

Modular Belt Conveyors 141

 Modular Belts

... for MBF-P 2040

mk offers two chain series for its modular belt
conveyor system to meet various customer re-
quirements. Series 8 modular belt chains are suit­
able for transporting medium-weight to heavy
3 goods such as containers, bottles, boxes, and so
on, in industrial applications. Series 10 is suitable
for transport of light to medium-heavy goods in
hygiene-sensitive areas. The side plates are avail­
able in heights of 25, 50, 75 and 100 mm and in
the colours light blue and white.

Series 8 (S8) Series 10 (S10)

Conveyor width B [mm] Chain width KB [mm] Conveyor width B [mm] Chain width KB [mm]

218.00 203.20 206.00 190.50

269.00 254.00 263.00 247.65

320.00* 304.80* 320.00* 304.80*

371.00 355.60 358.00 342.90

409.00 393.70 416.00 400.50

460.00 444.50 472.00 457.20

510.00* 495.30* 510.00* 495.30*

561.00 546.10 568.00 552.45

612.00 596.90 606.00 590.55

663.00* 647.70* 663.00* 647.70*

714.00 698.50 720.00 704.85

764.00 749.30 758.00 742.95

815.00* 800.10* 815.00* 800.10*

866.00 850.90 872.00 857.25

917.00 901.70 910.00 895.35

968.00* 952.50* 968.00* 952.50*

1018.00 1003.30 1006.00 990.60

*Belt width/chain width is identical for Series 8 and 10. They can be swapped with each other without
changing the conveyor frame.

142 Modular Belt Conveyors

 MB1 MB2

10 11,7

H1

H1
10,5

10,2
p p
3

A1

A1
KB

KB
NL=A3-10 NL=A3-11,7
A3 A3

Modular Belt Series 8 (S8) Series 10 (S10)

Cam height H1 25.4 mm and 76.2 mm 25 mm and 100 mm
others on request others on request

Cam spacing A3 25.4 mm in grid 25.4 mm in grid

Spacing p 25.4 mm 25.4 mm

Modular belt thickness 10.5 mm 10.2 mm

Min. edge clearance A1 With KFM, 38.1 mm With KFM, 38.1 mm

FDA/USDA suitability Partly FDA approval

Material PP: PE:
+5 to +100° C -70 to +65° C
Colours: white, light grey Colours: white, light blue

POM: PP:
-40 to +90° C +5 to +100° C
Colours: blue Colours: white, light blue

POM CR: POM:

-45 to +90° C -45 to +90° C
Colours: anthracite Colours: white, light blue

 pecially resistant to impacts

S
and cuts
Easy to clean
Minimal scoring
Low risk of material separati-
on

Modular Belt Conveyors 143

 Modular Belts

... for KMF-P 2040

The modular belt ASB 2.2 is highly resistant to

wear and abrasion, making it suitable for high
temperatures, contact with chemicals or food, etc.

Modular Belt ASB 2.2

149, 162, 226, 302, 379, 455, 531, 608, 684,
Chain width KB
761, 837 and 914 mm

Spacing p 25.4 mm

Modular belt thickness 12 mm

Minimum radius (internal) 2.2 x chain width (KB)

Back-flex radius 25.0 mm

FDA/USDA suitability FDA approval

Material POM:
-40 to +90° C
Colours: blue

144 Modular Belt Conveyors

 ... for KFS-P 2040.86

The particularly robust hinged plate belt is also

available in a stainless steel or perforated design
on request.

Hinged Plate Belt SK1

A1 (without side plate/with side plate) 38.1 mm
A2 25 mm
MB 147–647 mm
Cam height H1 20/40 mm
Side plate height H2 14 mm
Cam spacing A3 38.1 mm in grid
Colour Bright steel
Spacing p 38.1 mm
Chain thickness 13 mm
Material Steel
FDA/USDA suitability No
Technical properties Steel
Wear-resistant
Heat-resistant up to 300° C
Resistant to impact
Low friction coefficient

Max. total width B3

147 197 247 297 347 397 447 497 547 597 647
Tolerance ± 3.0 mm

Weight, kg/linear metre 4.6 5.6 6.6 7.7 8.7 9.7 10.8 11.8 12.8 13.9 14.9

Modular Belt Conveyors 145

 Application Examples

MBF-P 2040 with head drive AC as inclined conveyor

with collection hopper and movable support frame

MBF-P 2040 interlinking with a side rail on one MBF-P 2040 with side wall and cleats
side and a side wall on the opposite side to
­support the product

146 Modular Belt Conveyors

 3

Cycled modular belt conveyor with MBF-P 2040 with

bolted-on tubular brackets in a special design head drive AC and drip pan

Modular belt conveyor MBF-P 2040 with head drive AC Special short MBF-P 2040
and plastic bristles for gentle transport with laterally projecting
modular belt chain

Modular Belt Conveyors 147

 Application Examples

Curved KMF-P 2040 with 90° curve and adjustable side rails

Curved modular belt conveyors KMF-P 2040 KMF-P 2040 with drip pan and discharge
with a drive for complex route layouts chute for oily stamped parts

148 Modular Belt Conveyors

 3

Curved KMF-P 2040 with head drive

AC and drip pan along the entire length

KMF-P 2040 as an infeed for empty canisters

Modular Belt Conveyors 149

 Application Examples

KFM-P 2040 with drip pan and separator flap Swivelling KFM-P 2040 with
fixed fulcrum, swivel casters and
locking mechanism

KFM-P 2040 head drive AS KFM-P 2040 head drive AS

with protective box, hopper and drip pan in with transverse cleats and side plate
the lower run for slightly oily parts for the modular belt

150 Modular Belt Conveyors

 3

Solid support of the KFS-P 2040.86 KFS-P 2040.86 for hot product with
for conveying heavy loads resizeable supply reservoir

KF S-P 2040.86 head drive AC with KFS-P 2040.86 AF with two 45° inclines
perforated hinged plate belt, transverse
cleats and burls for better product grip

Modular Belt Conveyors 151

 Chapter 4 Timing Belt Conveyors

Selecting a Timing Belt Conveyor Timing Belt Conveyor

Timing Belt Conveyor 154 ZRF-P 2040 156 ZRF-P 2010 160
Head Drives 158 Head Drives 162
Lower Belt Drives  166
Wear Strips 168

152 Timing Belt Conveyor

 4

Timing Belts 170 Accessories Application Examples 176

 Pallets172
SU – Stopper Undamped 174
SD – Stopper Damped 175

Timing Belt Conveyor 153

 Selecting a Timing Belt Conveyor

Dimensions – Technical Data

Conveyor Conveyor Conveyor Total load* Speed ø of tails Reverse Accumu- Cycling
system widths lengths As standard, up to [mm] operation lated operation
[mm] [mm] up to [kg] [m/min] operation

Timing belt conveyor (single-line)

ZRF-P 2040 40/80/120/160 650–6000 250 60 approx. 102 • •
Timing belt conveyor (double-line)
4 ZRF-P 2010 200–1000 500–6000 250 60 approx. 89 • •

*Maximum load that is transported by the system in question with a standard configuration and for a standard application. The
permissible load depends on the width, timing belt material, load distribution, operating mode and environmental influences.

Selecting Double-line Conveyors based on Load and Speed

The diagram shows double-line conveyor systems based on their load and speed. The comparison shows
timing belt conveyors (ZRF), chain conveyors (KTF) and accumulating roller chain conveyors (SRF).

Total load m [kg]

SRF-P 2010 is
preferred for buffer
500
SRF-P 2010 KTF-P 2010 lines with a high load
with 0.25 kW with 0.55 kW and accumulation of
400
up to 15 m/min
300
ZRF-P 2010
200
is preferred for the
ZRF-P 2010 rapid transfer of
with 0.55 kW
100 single pallets with
ZRF-P 2010
high acceleration
with 0.25 kW
0
Speed [m/min] 0 6 12 18 24 30
Total load m [kg] per conveying path, per drive in continuous operation (accumulated operation maccumulated = 2 x m continuous)

Selecting the Stopper

Total load m [kg]

With a coated timing

SD-500
500 belt conveyor or chain
SU-400 conveyor (friction
400 coefficient µ = 0.2)
300 SD-260
With a well lubricated
200 accumulating roller
SD-160
chain conveyor (friction
100 SD-60
coefficient µ = 0.07)
SD-20
0
Speed [m/min] 0 6 12 18 24 30 Example of the effect of
Total load m [kg] to be slowed down by the stopper.
the friction coefficient

154 Timing Belt Conveyor

Application Options
Timing belt conveyors are ideal for the cycled transport of products. Available with different drive variants
and as a single, double or multiple line conveyor, they are often used to construct complex interlinking solu-
tions. The double-line solution is frequently used for transporting pallets. In such applications, timing belt
conveyors are used when high speeds and accelerations are required. Chain conveyors and accumulating
roller chain conveyors are used for high loads (see the image on the left and the next chapter).

Our range of different timing belt materials allows you to find the optimal grip for the workpieces in your
specific application. Options include aluminium timing belt pulleys, anodised timing belt pulleys and stain- 4
less steel timing belt pulleys (for reducing wear while improving corrosion resistance).

The timing belt conveyor ZRF-P 2040 is predominantly used as a single-line solution. Ribs or threaded
sleeves can be welded onto or preferably bolted onto the timing belt for product take-up. For bolted-on ribs,
the AT timing belt is used due to the wider tooth shape. In addition to greater tooth rigidity and the larger
load contact surface, this provides the necessary space for plug-in threaded sleeves. As a result, the
system is also suitable for precisely feeding and positioning loads weighing up to 250 kg.

As a double-line system, ZRF-P 2010 timing belt conveyors are ideal for the cycled transport of pallets or
products with a rigid structure. Combined with the wide range of drive options, the system is the perfect
basis for constructing complex interlinking and automation systems. The timing belt return inside the
profile allows for a compact design and reduces the risk of accidents to a minimum.

Timing Belts
The standard timing belts are made from polyurethane reinforced with high-strength steel cords. The
belts in the 2010 system have the T10 partition and are up to 32 mm wide (others available on request).
To ensure optimal transport, different surface coatings can be used (see page 159).

A coating on the teeth side (PAZ = polyamide tooth-side) is recommended for conveyor speeds above
30 m/min. Since standard timing belts with the PU base material on the teeth side tend to produce noise
when passing over the aluminium timing belt pulley a PAZ coating, in addition to good lubrication, is a
reliable solution to this problem.

The PAZ coating takes the form of a nylon fabric on the teeth side and is also available in an impregnated
version to meet ESD requirements. This use of this nylon fabric in cleanroom applications is controversial
because of the fine abrasion particles it produces. Many of our customers prefer the larger, visible parti-
cles produced by the PU base material. We can also provide a conductive base material on request for use
with electronic parts and in explosive atmospheres.

Timing Belt Conveyor 155

 Timing Belt Conveyor ZRF-P 2040

4 » For transport
cycled
and
precise positioning. «

The ZRF-P 2040 timing belt conveyor system

is ideally suited for use as a single line conveyor
for the cycled transport of piece goods. The
goods can be transported conventionally or
with a specific orientation.

In addition to different coatings that provide

optimal gripping of the workpiece, various ribs
to hold the workpiece can also be attached to
the surface of the timing belt, either welded on
or preferably screwed on.

The system is suitable for exact conveying,

feeding and positioning up to a total load of
250 kg. The system offers different timing belt
widths to suit your particular application, work-
piece dimensions and total load.

The conveyor frame profile also offers system

slots (10 mm slot width) on both sides for con-
nection stands, side rails, initiators and stop-
pers.

156 Timing Belt Conveyor

Benefits of the ZRF-P 2040

 ycled transport of piece goods, either

C
conventional or orientated
4
 recise conveying, feeding and positioning
P
up to 250 kg
 vailable as a single, double or multiple line
A
conveyor
 arious belt coatings for optimal gripping of
V
the workpiece
Ribs can be attached to hold the workpieces

Cross Section
conveyor width of 80 mm for this example

conveyor width B = 80

Wear strip mk 1040.13

Profile mk 2040.03

Wear strip mk 1040.12

Timing Belt Conveyors 157

 ZRF-P 2040 AC

Properties
The timing belt pulley ensures excellent transmission of the motor power. When using ribs, the max.
possible height must be requested.

4 B20.40.301

ø(D W) 102 ø(D W) 102

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 650 to 6000 mm

Conveyor width B 40/80/120/160 mm others on

request

Timing belt width 32/70/110/150 mm

Timing belt type p. 170

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath

Drive and speed up to 60 m/min, higher on request p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 125 kg for B = 40 mm/up to 250 kg for B = 80 mm or wider higher on
request
Standard distributed load up to 50 kg/m for B = 40 mm/up to 100 kg/m for B = 80 mm or wider

158 Timing Belt Conveyors

ZRF-P 2040 AS

Properties
The drive positioned laterally on the outside allows the total height of the conveyor to be restricted to a
minimum. The timing belt pulley ensures excellent transmission of the motor power. Use of ribs is possible
without restriction with this drive version.

B20.40.302 4

ø(D W) 102 ø(D W) 102

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 650 to 6000 mm

Conveyor width B 40/80/120/160 mm others on

request

Timing belt width 32/70/110/150 mm

Timing belt type p. 170

Drive location discharge end left/right

Drive and speed up to 60 m/min, higher on request p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 125 kg for B = 40 mm/up to 250 kg for B = 80 mm or wider higher on
request
Standard distributed load up to 50 kg/m for B = 40 mm/up to 100 kg/m for B = 80 mm or wider

Timing Belt Conveyors 159

 Timing Belt Conveyor ZRF-P 2010

4
»andForproducts
transporting pallets
with
a rigid structure. «

The ZRF-P 2010 timing belt conveyor system is

ideally suited for transporting heavy pallets and
products with a rigid structure. The positive con-
nection between the drive pulley and the timing
belt ensures that the two conveyor lines are syn-
chronised, making the system ideally suited for
cycling operation.

A feature of this conveyor system are the wear

strips made from ultra-high-molecular weight
polyethylene on which the timing belt runs and is
guided. This material provides a low coefficient
of friction and excellent wear characteristics
over a wide temperature range (up to 65° C over
extended periods). Another typical feature of this
system is the recirculation of the timing belt in-
side the profile frame. This reduces the risk of
accidents to a minimum.

The profile offers system slots (10 mm slot width)

on three sides for connecting stands, side rails
and stoppers. Combined with the wide range of
different drive options, this makes the system
the perfect basis for constructing complex inter-
linking and automation systems. Various coat­
ings on the surface of the timing belt ensure op-
timal gripping of the workpiece for your specific
application.

160 Timing Belt Conveyors

Benefits of the ZRF-P 2010

 ouble line and multiple line conveyor for

D 4
transporting pallets and products with a rigid
structure
Ideally suited for cycling operation, up to
250 kg
 iming belt recirculates inside the profiles
T
to produce a compact design
 arious belt coatings for optimal gripping
V
of the workpiece
Wide range of different drive options

Cross Section

Profile mk 2010

Wear strip mk 1041

Timing Belt Conveyors 161

 ZRF-P 2010 AA

Properties
The drive variant AA without a motor offers the advantage of operating multiple conveyor lines in parallel
or in series with one drive. Depending on the requirement, the conveyor is designed either with a hollow
shaft or with a connecting shaft with shaft journal (ø 20 mm, usable length 34 mm, incl. DIN 6885 key)
Operation with welded-on ribs is not possible with this version.

4 B20.10.350

ø(D W) 89 ø(D W) 89

For information about wear strip variants, see page 168

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 500 to 6000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 1000 mm

Timing belt width 32 mm p. 170

Drive and speed up to 60 m/min, higher on request p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 250 kg higher on

request
Standard distributed load up to 100 kg/m

162 Timing Belt Conveyors

ZRF-P 2010 AC

Properties
The timing belt pulley ensures excellent transmission of the motor power. Operation with welded-on ribs is
not possible with this version.

B20.10.351 4

ø(D W) 89 ø(D W) 89

For information about wear strip variants,

see page 168

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 500 to 6000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 1000 mm

Timing belt width 32 mm p. 170

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath

Drive and speed up to 60 m/min, higher on request p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 250 kg higher on

request
Standard distributed load up to 100 kg/m

Timing Belt Conveyors 163

 ZRF-P 2010 AF

Properties
Since the motor is fitted directly onto the drive shaft, the space requirements and maintenance effort
for this drive version are reduced to a minimum. Operation with welded-on ribs is not possible with this
version.

4 B20.10.357

ø(D W) 89 ø(D W) 89

For information about wear strip variants, see page 168 Flange ø 80

Flange ø 120

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 500 to 6000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 1000 mm

Timing belt width 32 mm p. 170

Drive location discharge end left/right

Drive and speed up to 60 m/min, higher on request p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 250 kg higher on

request
Standard distributed load up to 100 kg/m

164 Timing Belt Conveyors

ZRF-P 2010 AS

Properties
The drive positioned laterally on the outside allows the total height of the conveyor to be restricted to a
minimum. Operation with welded-on ribs is not possible with this version.

B20.10.355 4

ø(D W) 89 ø(D W) 89

For information about wear strip

variants, see page 168

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 700 to 6000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 1000 mm

Timing belt width 32 mm p. 170

Drive location discharge end left/right

Drive and speed up to 60 m/min, higher on request p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 250 kg higher on

request
Standard distributed load up to 100 kg/m

Timing Belt Conveyors 165

 ZRF-P 2010 BC

Properties
The compact conveyor frame design and the ability to freely select the drive position over the entire
length of the conveyor make it easier to integrate the conveyor into existing systems. The timing belt
pulley combined with the snub rollers ensures excellent transmission of the motor power. Operation
with welded-on ribs is not possible with this version.

4 B20.10.356

ø(D W) 89 ø(D W) 89

ø(D W) 89

For information about wear strip variants, see page 168

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 700 to 6000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 1000 mm

Timing belt width 32 mm p. 170

Drive location left/right underneath

Drive and speed up to 60 m/min, higher on request p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 250 kg higher on

request
Standard distributed load up to 100 kg/m

166 Timing Belt Conveyors

ZRF-P 2010 BF

Properties
Since the motor is fitted directly onto the drive shaft, the space requirements and maintenance effort for
this drive version are reduced to a minimum. The compact conveyor frame design and the ability to freely
select the drive position anywhere along the entire length of the conveyor make it easier to integrate the
conveyor into existing systems. The conveying direction is reversible. Operation with welded-on ribs is not
possible with this version.

B20.10.359 4

ø(D W) 89 ø(D W) 89

ø(D W) 89

For information about wear strip variants, see page 168

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 700 to 6000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 1000 mm

Timing belt width 32 mm p. 170

Drive location left/right underneath

5; 6.3; 8; 9.5; 11.5; 13.5; 15.2;

Drive and speed p. 12
19.3; 23; 26; 36.6; 45.7 and 57 m/min

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 250 kg higher on

request
Standard distributed load up to 100 kg/m

Timing Belt Conveyors 167

 ZRF-P 2010 Wear Strips

Wear and guide strips from mk ensure low friction.

The wear strips are made from PE – UHMW (PE – 1000). Max. temperature 65° C.

Variant A Variant B

Top wear strip mk 1042 Top wear strip mk 1041

22.42.2000 22.41.2000
Bottom wear strip Bottom wear strip
21.14.0001 21.14.0001
Closure strip Closure strip
K10230/12 K10230/12

Variant C

Top wear strip mk 1110

B20.10.359.600
Bottom wear strip
21.14.0001
Closure strip
K10230/12

168 Timing Belt Conveyors

Notes

Timing Belt Conveyors 169

 Timing Belts

The standard timing belts are made from

polyurethane reinforced with high-strength steel
cords. The belts have the T10 partition and a
width of 32 mm (others available on request).
To ensure optimal transport, different surface
coatings can be used. An additional coating on
the teeth side (PAZ = polyamide tooth side) is
recommended for conveying speeds above
4 30 m/min as well as to reduce friction and noise.

Timing belt material

Basic material Surface coating

Rubber
Properties Polyamide PVC, white,
Polyurethane structure Linatex***
PAR/PAZ** FDA
(Supergrip)*

Resistance to moisture + +

Resistance to oil and

grease
+ +- + +-

Suitable for contact with

food (FDA compliant)
+

Abrasion resistance + +-
Wear resistance +
Adhesion property
(inclined conveying)
+ ++

Anti-frictional property
(accumulated operation)
- + -

Cut resistance +
Low noise levels + (PAZ)
Colour Various Green White Green Red

Temperature -40 to
-20 to +60° C -20 to +60° C -10 to +90° C -40 to +70° C
resistance +100° C

Hardness 90 Shore A 65 Shore A 40 Shore A 40 Shore A

*Not suitable for use in ZRF-P 2010 except as a special version with conveyor frame open on the bottom
**PAR = polyamide rear (carrying) side; PAZ = polyamide tooth side
***Counter-bending, such as in lower belt drives, is not permitted

170 Timing Belt Conveyors

Notes

Timing Belt Conveyors 171

 Accessories

Pallets
Pallets can be custom-configured to suit your
specific application, whether they are delivered
fully assembled or for self-assembly. The permit-
ted total weight per pallet is determined by the total
load capacity per metre of the system (100 kg/m).
Please note that the clear width of the side rail
4 must be 2 to 4 mm wider than the width of the
pallet to guide the pallet in the optimal way.
Individual pallet components:
 luminium profile frame consisting of the
A
profile mk 2260 and the corner pieces
Plastic wear strips PE-1000
below the profile frame
Al support plate  upport plates in varying thickness: 5, 6, 8, 10
S
M5 countersunk head screw, and 12 mm
D7991512
Bumpers/rubber buffers
Profile mk 2260 Positioning sockets

Bumper, ø 8 mm

Corner piece

Pallet with
support plate

M4x8 countersunk
head screw, D79948

Wear strip
BWT LWT
Drill bushing D0172A610

32

WPT L PT Support plate Weight PT

mm mm mm kg
Pallet without
400 400 8 5
support plate
400 600 8 8
600 600 10 14
600 800 10 16
800 800 12 24
800 1000 12 30

172 Timing Belt Conveyors

 Pallets
Stopping and Separating
To stop or separate the pallets, the stoppers can
be positioned at the centre or on the outside.

Central stop position

Centre of Gravity
The position of the product being transported
must be taken into consideration to ensure that
transport is smooth and as faultless as possible.

We recommend positioning the centre of gravity

of the product being transported as close to the
middle of the pallet as possible. In addition, the
height of the centre of gravity should not be more
than 0.5 times the shortest side length of the
pallet.

Outer stop position

Timing Belt Conveyors 173

 Accessories

SU – Stopper Undamped
Stoppers are used to stop or separate the pallets.
The stopper variants are selected based on the
conveyor weight and conveyor speed. Customers
can choose between a variety of stroke heights
based on their requirements. Damped or undam-
ped stoppers can be connected in the centre or on
4 the sides.

They can be requested through inductive (I) or

electric (E) sensors.

Return Stop
The return stop is used in combination with a stop- 49,75
Hub

per in transfer systems with low belt friction and

prevents pallets from recoiling/rebounding while
38,35

stopping. The return stop is activated through a

spring.
H

40 50
35 7,5

SU 400
SA=single-acting (locked in a depressurised state)
Ident. no. Stroke V=6 V=9 V=12 V=18
m/min m/min m/min m/min
Re-
quest (mm) [kg] [kg] [kg] [kg]

Return Stop K503011401 E 9 400 300 250 200

K503030101 K503011405 I 9 400 300 250 200

Lowering stroke: 8 mm K503011404 - 9 400 300 250 200

K503011406 E 15 400 300 250 200

K503011402 - 15 400 300 250 200

DA=double-acting (maintains the last position reached)

K503012401 E 9 400 300 250 200

K503012404 - 9 400 300 250 200

K503012405 I 9 400 300 250 200

174 Timing Belt Conveyors

 SD – Stopper Damped
Damped stopping allows you to gently slow down
the first pallet. Damping prevents the workpiece
from slipping in a certain location. Electrical or
inductive sensors on the stoppers are optional. A
minimum mass of 3 kg is required to ensure proper
functioning. Damped or undamped stoppers can
be connected in the centre or on the sides.
4
They can be requested through inductive (I) or
electric (E) sensors.

75,9
6
98,4
Hub

8
38,8 / 44

86,5
78,5
H

40,15

40 60 101
35 7,5 85 8 44

SD 60 SD 100
SA=single-acting (locked in a depressurised state) SA=single-acting (locked in a depressurised state)
Ident. no. Stroke V=6 V=12 V=24 V=30 Ident. no. Stroke V=6 V=12 V=24 V=30
m/min m/min m/min m/min m/min m/min m/min m/min
Re- Re-
quest (mm) [kg] [kg] [kg] [kg] quest (mm) [kg] [kg] [kg] [kg]
K503021061 E 8 3-60 3-35 3-24 3-18 K503021101 - 8 3-100 3-60 3-40 3-30

K503021063 - 8 3-60 3-35 3-24 3-18 K503021102 I 8 3-100 3-60 3-40 3-30

K503021064 I 8 3-60 3-35 3-24 3-18

DA=double-acting (maintains the last position reached)
DA=double-acting (maintains the last position reached) K503022101 - 8 3-100 3-60 3-40 3-30

K503022061 E 8 3-60 3-35 3-24 3-18 K503022102 I 8 3-100 3-60 3-40 3-30

K503022063 - 9 3-60 3-35 3-24 3-18

The specifications apply for a friction coefficient of µ = 0.07
K503022064 I 10 3-60 3-35 3-24 3-18 Stoppers for heavier loads available upon request

The specifications apply for a friction coefficient of µ = 0.07

Stoppers for heavier loads available upon request

Timing Belt Conveyors 175

 Application Examples

ZRF-P 2040, threaded sleeves integrated into the timing belt

enable customer-specific cams to be bolted on

Four-line timing belt conveyor ZRF-P 2040 with

bolted-on product holders

176 Timing Belt Conveyors

 3

ZRF-P 2040 with drive AC and

attached prisms for holding rods

Dual timing belt conveyor ZRF-P 2040 with VA steel insert frames bolted
ZRF-P 2040 with head drive AS onto the timing belt for picking up the product

Timing Belt Conveyors 177

 Application Examples

ZRF-P 2040 as feed system and

storage system with side rail and controller

Interlink ZRF-P 2040 with lift and transfer for lockers

178 Timing Belt Conveyors

 3

Width-adjustable dual timing belt conveyor with cleats

Lift and transfer with turn station ZRF-P 2040 as channelling and
and pneumatic feed stroke separating module with lift and transfer

Timing Belt Conveyors 179

 Application Examples

ZRF-P 2010 with coupled lift and transfer conveyor

ZRF-P 2010 with drive BC and side rail Timing belt conveyor with support
frame and drip pan

180 Timing Belt Conveyors

 3

Interlink ZRF-P 2010 as loading and unloading station for

bread roll production with stacking unit as a buffer

ZRF-P 2010 with stopper/separator function ZRF-P 2010 with head drive AS on rotary
and Makrolon cover as protective guard module (0/90/180/270°)

Timing Belt Conveyors 181

 Chapter 5 Chain Conveyors

5
Selecting a Chain Conveyor Accumulating Roller Chain
Chain Conveyor 184 KTF-P 2010 186 Conveyor SRF-P 2010 196
Head Drives 188 Head Drives 198
Lower Run Drives  192 Lower Run Drives 202
Wear Strips 194 Wear Strips 204

Accumulating Roller Chain Chains Accessories

Conveyor SRF-P 2012 206
For KTF-P 2010 214 Pallets216
Head Drives 208 For SRF-P 2010 and Maintenance Equipment 217
Lower Run Drives  211 SRF-P 2012 215 SU – Stopper Undamped 218
Wear Strips 213 SD – Stopper Damped 219

182 Chain Conveyors

 5
Application Examples 220

Chain Conveyors 183

 Selecting a Chain Conveyor

Dimensions – Technical Data

Conveyor Conveyor Conveyor Total load* Speed ø of tails Reverse Accumu­ Cycling
system widths lengths as standard, up to [mm] operation lated operation
[mm] [mm] up to [kg] [m/min] operation

Chain conveyor
KTF-P 2010 200–2000 500–10000 500 30 approx. 90 • • •
Accumulating roller chain conveyor belt
SRF-P 2010 200–2000 500–10000 500 30 approx. 90 •
SRF-P 2012 200–2000 1000–10000 1000 30 approx. 90 •
5 *Maximum load that is transported by the system in question with a standard configuration and for a standard application.
The permissible load depends on the width, chain type, load distribution, operating mode and environmental influences.

Selecting Double-line Conveyors based on Load and Speed

The diagram shows double-line conveyor systems based on their load and speed. The comparison shows
timing belt conveyors (ZRF), chain conveyors (KTF) and accumulating roller chain conveyors (SRF).

Total load m [kg]

SRF-P 2010 is
preferred for buffer lines
500
SRF-P 2010 KTF-P 2010 with a high load and
with 0.25 kW with 0.55 kW accumulation of up to
400
15 m/min
300
ZRF-P 2010 is
200 preferred for the rapid
ZRF-P 2010 transfer of single pallets
with 0.55 kW
100 with high acceleration
ZRF-P 2010
with 0.25 kW
0
Speed [m/min] 0 6 12 18 24 30
Total load m [kg] per conveying path, per drive in continuous operation (accumulated operation
maccumulated = 2 x m continuous)

Selecting the Stopper

Total load m [kg]

With a coated timing

SD-500
500 belt conveyor or chain
conveyor (friction
SU-400
400 coefficient µ = 0.2)

300 SD-260 With a well lubricated

200 accumulating roller
SD-160
chain conveyor (friction
100 SD-60
coefficient µ = 0.07)
SD-20
0
Speed [m/min] 0 6 12 18 24 30 Example of the effect of
the friction coefficient
Total load m [kg] to be slowed down by the stopper.

184 Chain Conveyors

Application Options
Chain conveyors are ideal for the cycled transport of products. Available with different drive variants, they
are often used for setting up complex interlinking solutions. They are typically used for transferring pallets
with high loads and even speeds in a double-line area. For high speeds or positioning tasks, low-mainte-
nance and low-noise timing belt conveyors are used (see the image on the left and the previous chapter).
Various chain types in combination with our sturdy, solid wear strips ensure reliable, long-term functioning
that is optimally suited to your application.

The chain conveyor KTF-P 2010 is primarily used as the basic element for constructing transfer lines. It is
available as a single, dual or multiple line system with either a simple roller chain or a duplex roller chain
for higher loads and a larger support surface.
5
The accumulating roller chain conveyor SRF-P 2010 is also based on the profile mk 2010 and is suitable for
accumulated operation. The conveyor is therefore ideal for interlinking and buffering between workstations.
Like all chain conveyors, the system can be equipped with an optional tensioning device and continuous
lubrication device.

The design of our accumulating roller chain conveyor SRF-P 2012 for the heavier load range of up to
1000 kg ensures smooth operation thanks to the free-spinning conveyor rollers, even during accumulated
operation. The accumulation force is kept to a minimum. Typical applications for this chain conveyor
include interlinking workstations or buffering between workstations and assembly stations.

Chains
The chains used (see page 202) are available in various designs to ensure optimal function in your specific
application. Our standard product range includes a single roller chain and a duplex roller chain. The duplex
chain can convey higher loads and offers a larger contact surface.

Accumulating roller chains with either plastic or steel rollers are available for accumulated operation.
Plastic rollers produce less noise and require less maintenance than steel rollers, but they are not suitable
for environments with sustained temperatures above 60° C, in painting applications or in potentially
explosive atmospheres. When using steel rollers, note that plastic wear strips (PE or POM) must be
attached to the contact surfaces on the pallets to be transported.

The accumulating roller chain is available with accumulating rollers in rows one behind the other (more
robust with higher breaking resistance) or accumulating rollers that are offset from each other. The offset
accumulating rollers offer more contact points and therefore smoother operation as well as a higher max.
load for the line. These chains can also be equipped with a finger guard in accordance with the German
accident prevention regulations (UVV).

In contrast to timing belts, chains must always be well lubricated. They can be used in temperatures up to
60° C or up to 120° C. Higher temperatures can be achieved on request. Low-maintenance chains are also
available as an option.

Chain Conveyors 185

 Chain Conveyor KTF-P 2010

» For transporting
heavier loads even in
5 harsh environments. «
The KTF-P 2010 chain conveyor is a conveyor
system for moderate loads and is ideally sui-
ted for transporting pallets. Its large selection
of drives makes it extremely flexible, and it is
normally used as the basis for constructing
transfer lines.

It is available as a single, dual or multiple line

system with either a simple roller chain or a
duplex roller chain for higher loads and a lar-
ger support surface. The various chains and
wear strip guides allow the workpiece to be
optimally placed on the conveyor, while their
excellent anti-frictional properties make them
extremely low maintenance and sturdy.

Longitudinal slots in the mk 2010 profile

beam provide flexible options for connecting
struts, guides, initiators and components
from the mk profile system. Like all chain
conveyors, the system can be equipped with
an optional tensioning device and continuous
lubrication device.

186 Chain Conveyors

Benefits of the KTF-P 2010

 asis for constructing transfer systems for

B
higher loads
Ideal as a dual or multiple line system for 5
transporting pallets
L arge selection of drives
 ow-maintenance and sturdy use in cycling
L
operation
S uitable for dirty and oily environments

Cross Section

Profile mk 2010

Wear strip mk 1034

Chain Conveyors 187

 KTF-P 2010 AA

Properties
The drive variant AA without a motor offers the advantage of operating multiple conveyor lines in parallel
or in series with one drive. Depending on your requirements, the conveyor is designed either with a hollow
shaft or with a connecting shaft with shaft journal. Operation with cleats is not possible with this version.

B20.10.465

5
L B+20
ø(Dw )89 ø(Dw )89

8
110
ø20
For information about wear strip variants, see page 194 onwards

Available with optional tensioning device

220

and lubrication station (see page 217)

370
43 160
B+30
B-50
B

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 500 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm

Chains 1/2" single or duplex p. 214

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 500 kg up to

1000 kg
Standard distributed load up to 150 kg/m (with duplex chain) on request

188 Chain Conveyors

KTF-P 2010 AC

Properties
The sprocket ensures excellent transmission of the motor power. Operation with cleats is not possible with
this version.

B20.10.466
L

For information about wear strip

variants, see page 194 onwards

Available with optional tensioning device

and lubrication station (see page 217)

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 500 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm

Chains 1/2" single or duplex p. 214

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 500 kg up to

1000 kg
Standard distributed load up to 150 kg/m (with duplex chain) on request

Chain Conveyors 189

 KTF-P 2010 AF

Properties
Since the motor is fitted directly onto the drive shaft, the space requirements and maintenance effort for
this drive version are reduced to a minimum. Operation with cleats is not possible with this version.

B20.10.467

For information about wear strip variants, see page 194

Available with optional tensioning device

and lubrication station (see page 217)

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 500 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm

Chains 1/2" single or duplex p. 214

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 500 kg up to

1000 kg
Standard distributed load up to 150 kg/m (with duplex chain) on request

190 Chain Conveyors

KTF-P 2010 AS

Properties
The drive positioned laterally on the outside allows the total height of the conveyor to be restricted to a
minimum. Operation with cleats is not possible with this version.

B20.10.468

For information about wear strip variants, see page 194

Available with optional tensioning device

and lubrication station (see page 217)

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 700 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm

Chains 1/2" single or duplex p. 214

Drive location discharge end left/right

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 500 kg up to

1000 kg
Standard distributed load up to 150 kg/m (with duplex chain) on request

Chain Conveyors 191

 KTF-P 2010 BC

Properties
The compact conveyor frame design and the ability to freely select the drive position over the entire length
of the conveyor make it easier to integrate the conveyor into existing systems. The drive sprocket wheel
ensures excellent transmission of the motor power. Operation with cleats is not possible with this version.

B20.10.471

For information about wear strip variants, see page 194 onwards

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 700 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm

Chains 1/2" single or duplex p. 214

Drive location left/right underneath

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 500 kg up to

1000 kg
Standard distributed load up to 150 kg/m (with duplex chain) on request

192 Chain Conveyors

KTF-P 2010 BF

Properties
Since the motor is fitted directly onto the drive shaft, the space requirements and maintenance effort for
this drive version are reduced to a minimum. The compact conveyor frame design and the ability to freely
select the drive position anywhere along the entire length of the conveyor make it easier to integrate the
conveyor into existing systems. The conveying direction is reversible. Operation with cleats is not possible
with this version.

B20.10.472

For information about wear strip variants, see page 194 onwards

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 700 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm

Chains 1/2" single or duplex p. 214

Drive location left/right underneath

Drive and speed 5; 6.3; 8; 9.5; 11.5; 13.5; 15.2; 19.3; p. 12

23; 26; 36.6; 45.7 and 57 m/min

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 500 kg up to

1000 kg
Standard distributed load up to 150 kg/m (with duplex chain) on request

Chain Conveyors 193

 KTF-P 2010 Wear Strips

Wear and guide strips from mk ensure low friction.

The wear strips are made from PE-UHMW (PE-1000). Max. temperature of 65° C.

Variant A Variant B

Top wear strip mk 1037 Top wear strip mk 1038

22.37.2000 22.38.2000

Bottom wear strip Bottom wear strip

21.14.0001 21.14.0001

Closure strip Closure strip

K10230/12 K10230/12

Variant C Variant D

Top wear strip mk 1033 Top wear strip mk 1034

22.33.2000 22.34.2000

Bottom wear strip Bottom wear strip

21.14.0001 21.14.0001

Closure strip Closure strip

K10230/12 K10230/12

194 Chain Conveyors

Variant E

Top wear strip mk 1111

23.11.2000

Bottom wear strip

21.14.0001

Closure strip
K10230/12

Chain Conveyors 195

 Accumulating Roller Chain Conveyor SRF-P 2010

» For transporting
and buffering pallets
5 with high loads. «
The SRF-P 2010 accumulating roller chain con-
veyor is intended as the basis for constructing
transfer lines for loads up to 500 kg. The
freespin­ning conveyor rollers run smoothly,
even during accumulated operation. They
also keep accumulation forces to a minimum.
Typical applications include interlinking or
buffering between workstations and building
complete transfer lines.

Longitudinal slots in the mk 2010 profile beam

provide flexible options for connecting struts,
guides, initiators and components from the
mk profile system. Like all chain conveyors,
the system can be equipped with an optional
tensioning device and continuous lubrication
device.

The wear and guide strips that support and

guide the timing belt are made from ultra-high-
molecular weight polyethylene (PE-UHMW),
and provide a low friction coefficient with
excellent wear characteristics over a wide
temperature range (up to 65° C over extended
periods).

196 Chain Conveyors

Benefits of the SRF-P 2010

 asis for constructing transfer lines with

B
accumulated operation
Ideal for low-maintenance and durable use 5
in accumulated and cycling operation
 or interlinking and buffering between work­
F
stations and for transporting pallets
L arge selection of drives
S uitable for dirty and oily environments

Cross Section

Profile mk 2010

Wear strip mk 1047

Wear strip mk 1048

Chain Conveyors 197

 SRF-P 2010 AA

Properties
The drive variant AA without a motor offers the advantage of operating multiple conveyor lines in parallel
or in series with one drive. Depending on the requirement, the conveyor is designed either with a hollow
shaft or with a connecting shaft with shaft journal (ø 20 mm, usable length 34 mm, incl. DIN 6885 key)

B20.10.565

For information about wear strip variants, see page 204

Available with optional tensioning device

and lubrication station (see page 217)

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 730 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm

Chains 1/2" accumulating roller chain with plastic or steel rollers p. 215

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 500 kg (750 kg without accumulated operation) higher on

request
Standard distributed load up to 100 kg/m (in series)
up to 150 kg/m (offset)

198 Chain Conveyors

SRF-P 2010 AC

Properties
The sprocket ensures excellent transmission of the motor power.

B20.10.566

For information about wear strip

variants, see page 204

Available with optional tensioning device

and lubrication station (see page 217)

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 730 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm

Chains 1/2" accumulating roller chain with plastic or steel rollers p. 215

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 500 kg (750 kg without accumulated operation) higher on

request
Standard distributed load up to 100 kg/m (in series)
up to 150 kg/m (offset)

Chain Conveyors 199

 SRF-P 2010 AF

Properties
Since the motor is fitted directly onto the drive shaft, the space requirements and maintenance
effort for this drive version are reduced to a minimum.

B20.10.567

For information about wear strip variants, see page 204

Available with optional tensioning device

and lubrication station (see page 217)

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 730 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm

Chains 1/2" accumulating roller chain with plastic or steel rollers p. 215

Drive location discharge end left/right

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 500 kg (750 kg without accumulated operation) higher on

request
Standard distributed load up to 100 kg/m (in series)
up to 150 kg/m (offset)

200 Chain Conveyors

SRF-P 2010 AS

Properties
The drive positioned laterally on the outside allows the total height of the conveyor to be restricted to
a minimum.

B20.10.568

For information about wear strip variants, see page 204

Available with optional tensioning device

and lubrication station (see page 217)

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 730 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm

Chains 1/2" accumulating roller chain with plastic or steel rollers p. 215

Drive location discharge end left/right

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 500 kg (750 kg without accumulated operation) higher on

request
Standard distributed load up to 100 kg/m (in series)
up to 150 kg/m (offset)

Chain Conveyors 201

 SRF-P 2010 BC

Properties
The compact conveyor frame design and the ability to freely select the drive position over the entire length
of the conveyor make it easier to integrate the conveyor into existing systems. The drive sprocket wheel
ensures excellent transmission of the motor power.

B20.10.571
5
L

For information about wear strip variants, see page 204

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 730 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm

Chains 1/2" accumulating roller chain with plastic or steel rollers p. 215

Drive location left/right underneath

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 500 kg (750 kg without accumulated operation) higher on

request
Standard distributed load up to 100 kg/m (in series)
up to 150 kg/m (offset)

202 Chain Conveyors

SRF-P 2010 BF

Properties
Since the motor is fitted directly onto the drive shaft, the space requirements and maintenance effort for
this drive version are reduced to a minimum. The compact conveyor frame design and the ability to freely
select the drive position anywhere along the entire length of the conveyor make it easier to integrate the
conveyor into existing systems. The conveying direction is reversible. Operation with cleats is not possible
with this version.

B20.10.572
L
5

For information about wear strip variants, see page 204

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 730 to 10000 mm

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm

Chains 1/2" accumulating roller chain with plastic or steel rollers p. 215

Drive location left/right underneath

5; 6.3; 8; 9.5; 11.5; 13.5; 15.2; 19.3;

Drive and speed p. 12
23; 26; 36.6; 45.7 and 57 m/min

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 500 kg (750 kg without accumulated operation) higher on

request
Standard distributed load up to 100 kg/m (in series)
up to 150 kg/m (offset)

Chain Conveyors 203

 SRF-P 2010 Wear Strips

Wear and guide strips from mk ensure low friction.

The wear strips are made from PE-UHMW (PE-1000). Max. temperature of 65° C.

Variant A Variant B

Top wear strip mk 1048 Top right wear strip mk 1047

22.48.2000 22.47.2000

Bottom wear strip Top left wear strip mk 1048

21.14.0001 22.48.2000

Closure strip Bottom wear strip

K10230/12 21.14.0001

Closure strip
Variant C
K10230/12

Top wear strip mk 1112

23.12.2000

Bottom wear strip

21.14.0001

Closure strip
K10230/12

204 Chain Conveyors

Notes

Chain Conveyors 205

 Accumulating Roller Chain Conveyor SRF-P 2012

» For feeding
and buffering in heavy
5 load ranges. «

The SRF-P 2012 accumulating roller chain con­

veyor is intended as the basis for constructing
transfer lines for loads up to 1000 kg. The
freespin­ning conveyor rollers run smoothly, even
during accumulated operation. They also keep
accumulation forces to a minimum. Typical
applications include interlinking or buffering
between workstations and building complete
transfer lines.

Longitudinal slots in the mk 2012 profile beam

provide flexible options for connecting struts,
guides, initiators and components from the
mk profile system. Like all chain conveyors,
the system can be equipped with an optional
tensioning device and continuous lubrication
device to extend the service intervals.

The wear and guide strips that support and guide

the timing belt are made from ultra-high-molecu-
lar weight polyethylene (PE-UHMW), and provide
a low friction coefficient with excellent wear
char­acteristics over a wide temperature range
(up to 65° C over extended periods).

206 Chain Conveyors

Benefits of the SRF-P 2012

 ycled transport of piece goods, either

C
conventional or orientated
 recise conveying, feeding and positioning
P
up to 250 kg
 vailable as a single, double or multiple line
A
5
conveyor
 arious belt coatings for optimal gripping
V
of the workpiece
Ribs can be attached to hold the workpieces
S uitable for dirty and oily environments

Cross Section

Profile mk 2012

Wear strip mk 1050

Wear strip mk 1089

Chain Conveyors 207

 SRF-P 2012 AA

Properties
The AA drive variant offers the benefit of operating multiple conveyor lines in parallel or in series with
one drive. Depending on your requirements, the conveyor is designed either with a hollow shaft or with
a connecting shaft with shaft journal (ø 20/25 mm, usable length of 40 mm, includes DIN 6885 key).

B20.12.008
5

ø(D W) 98 ø(D W) 98

For information about wear strip variants, see page 213

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 1000–10000 mm (note the chain pitch)

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm

Chains 3/4" accumulating roller chain with plastic or steel rollers p. 215

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 1000 kg higher on

request
Standard distributed load up to 150 kg/m

208 Chain Conveyors

SRF-P 2012 AC

Properties
The sprocket ensures excellent transmission of the motor power.

B20.12.007
5

ø(D W) 98 ø(D W) 98

For information about wear strip variants, see page 213

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 1000–10000 mm (note the chain pitch)

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm

Chains 3/4" accumulating roller chain with plastic or steel rollers p. 215

Drive location discharge end left/right, underneath

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 1000 kg higher on

request
Standard distributed load up to 150 kg/m

Chain Conveyors 209

 SRF-P 2012 AS

Properties
The drive positioned laterally on the outside allows the total height of the conveyor to be restricted to
a minimum.

B20.12.009
5

ø(D W) 98 ø(D W) 98

For information about wear strip variants, see page 213

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 1000–10000 mm (note the chain pitch)

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm

Chains 3/4" accumulating roller chain with plastic or steel rollers p. 215

Drive location discharge end left/right

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 1000 kg higher on

request
Standard distributed load up to 150 kg/m

210 Chain Conveyors

SRF-P 2012 BC

Properties
The compact conveyor frame design and the ability to freely select the drive position over the entire length
of the conveyor make it easier to integrate the conveyor into existing systems.

B20.12.010
5
ø(D W) 98 ø(D W) 98

ø(D W) 98

For information about wear strip variants, see page 213

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 1000–10000 mm (note the chain pitch)

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm

Chains 3/4" accumulating roller chain with plastic or steel rollers p. 215

Drive location left/right underneath

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 1000 kg higher on

request
Standard distributed load up to 150 kg/m

Chain Conveyors 211

 SRF-P 2012 BF

Properties
Since the motor is fitted directly onto the drive shaft, the space requirements and maintenance effort for
this drive version are reduced to a minimum. The compact conveyor frame design and the ability to freely
select the drive position over the entire length of the conveyor make it easier to integrate the conveyor into
existing systems.

B20.12.011
5

ø(D W) 98 ø(D W) 98

ø(D W) 98

For information about wear strip variants, see page 213

Technical data
Conveyor length L individual from 1000–10000 mm (note the chain pitch)

Conveyor width B 200 to 2000 mm

Chains 3/4" accumulating roller chain with plastic or steel rollers p. 215

Drive location discharge end left/right

Drive and speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stand and side rail from p. 280

Standard total load up to 1000 kg higher on

request
Standard distributed load up to 150 kg/m

212 Chain Conveyors

SRF-P 2012 Wear Strips

Wear and guide strips from mk ensure low friction.

The wear strips are made from PE-UHMW (PE-1000). Temperature range up to a maximum of 65° C.

Variant A Variant B

60 60
21
21

39,5
24
5

Top wear strip mk 1089 Top right wear strip mk 1050

22.89.2000 22.50.2000

Bottom wear strip mk 1022 Top left wear strip mk 1089

22.22.2000 22.89.2000

Bottom wear strip mk 1022

22.22.2000

Chain Conveyors 213

 Chains

... for KTF-P 2010

Single roller chain with straight nuts Double roller chain with straight nuts

KTF-P 2010 KTF-P 2010

Steel chain K11402 Steel chain K11416
Locking link K114020001 Locking link K114160001

St = steel roll, VSG = locking link

Dimensions in mm
p 12.70 (1/2 x 5/16) p 2.70 (1/2 x 5/16)
b1 7.75 b1 7.75
b2 11.30 b2 11.30
b3 • b3 •
b4 • b4 •
d1 8.51 d1 8.51
g 11.50 g 11.80
d2 4.45 d2 4.45
l1 17 l1 •
l2 • l2 31
e • e 13.92
l • l •
b5 • b5 •
d • d •
up to 60° C, special version up to 120° C

214 Chain Conveyors

... for SRF-P 2010 and SRF-P 2012
Accumulating roller chain with Accumulating roller chain with
accumulating rollers in series accumulating rollers offset

SRF-P 2010 SRF-P 2012 SRF-P 2010 SRF-P 2012

Steel chain K11418 Steel chain K11415 Steel chain K11421 Steel chain K11423
Chain, plastic roller, K11435 Chain, plastic roller, Chain, plastic roller, Chain, plastic roller,
Steel chain, finger guard,
K11425 K11407 K11420 K11422
Chain, plastic roller, finger Locking link Locking link Locking link
guard, K11424 K114060001 K114180001 K114060001
Locking link K114180001
St = steel roller, Kst = plastic roller, FES = protective finger guard, VSG = locking link
Dimensions in mm
p 12.70 (1/2") 19.05 (3/4") p 12.70 (1/2") 19.05 (3/4")
b1 7.75 11.68 b1 9.20 11.70
b2 11.15 15.62 _ _ _
b3 11.40 15.80 b3 11.40 15.80
b4 14.70 20 b4 14.50 19.55
d1 8.50 12 d1 8.51 12.07
g • • g • •
d2 4.45 5.72 d2 4.45 5.72
l1 • • l1 • •
l2 • • l2 • •
e • • e 18.70 31.50
l 27 48 l 27 45
b5 4 11.50 b5 6.25 12.73
d 16 24 d 16 24
up to 60° C, special version up to 120° C

Chain Conveyors 215

 Accessories

Pallets
Pallets can be custom-configured to suit your
specific application, whether they are delivered
fully assembled or for self-assembly. The permit-
ted total weight per pallet is determined by the
total load capacity per metre of the system (100
kg/m). Please note that the clear width of the side
rail must be 2 to 4 mm wider than the width of
the pallet to guide the pallet in the optimal way.
Individual pallet components:
5  luminium profile frame consisting of the
A
profile mk 2260 and the corner pieces
Plastic wear strips PE-1000
below the profile frame
Al support plate  upport plates in varying thickness:
S
M5 countersunk head screw, 5, 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm
D7991512
Bumpers/rubber buffers
Profile mk 2260 Positioning sockets

Bumper, ø 8 mm

Corner piece

Pallet with
support plate

M4x8 countersunk
head screw, D79948

Wear strip
BWT LWT

Drill bushing D0172A610

32

WPT L PT Support plate Weight PT

mm mm mm kg
Pallet without
400 400 8 5
support plate
400 600 8 8
600 600 10 14
600 800 10 16
800 800 12 24
800 1000 12 30

216 Chain Conveyors

Maintenance Kit
Tensioning and Lubrication Station
KTF/SRF-P 2010
The use of the optional automatic tensioning and
lubrication station lets you avoid unnecessary
maintenance tasks. There is no need to manually
retension or manually oil the chain. Automatic ten-
sioning does not change the length of the conveyor.
In addition to the visual tensioning distance moni-
tor, a tensioning distance sensor is also available,
both with and without a lubricant insert.
5

Tensioning Device for SRF-P 2012

mk offers an optional automatic tensioning device
that uses a traffic light marking to indicate when
the chain needs to be shortened.
Green: OK
Yellow: Shortening not yet required
 ed: Chain must be shortened if the maximum
R
elongation of 3% of the chain has not been
reached
When the elongation reaches 3%, the chain and
the sprocket wheels must be replaced.

Assembly Aid for Chain Replacement

To replace the accumulating roller chain, you must
relieve the tension at the tail. The built-in assembly
aid makes it easier to replace the chain by allowing
you to remove one part of the wear strip separately.
You must then advance the accumulating roller
chain until the chain lock with the blue ring appears
in the opened area. You can now replace the accu-
mulating roller chain.

Chain Conveyors 217

 Accessories

SU – Stopper Undamped
Stoppers are used to stop or separate the pallets.
The stopper variants are selected based on the
conveyor weight and conveyor speed. Customers
can choose between a variety of stroke heights
based on their requirements. Damped or undamped
stoppers can be connected in the centre or on the
sides.

They can be requested through inductive (I) or

5 electric (E) sensors.

Return Stop
The return stop is used in combination with a stop- 49,75
Hub

per in transfer systems with low belt friction and

prevents pallets from recoiling/rebounding while
38,35

stopping. The return stop is activated through a

spring.
H

40 50
35 7,5

SU 400
SA=single-acting (locked in a depressurised state)
Ident. no. Stroke V=6 V=9 V=12 V=18
m/min m/min m/min m/min
Re-
quest (mm) [kg] [kg] [kg] [kg]

Return Stop K503011401 E 9 400 300 250 200

K503030101 K503011405 I 9 400 300 250 200

Lowering stroke: 8 mm K503011404 - 9 400 300 250 200

K503011406 E 15 400 300 250 200

K503011402 - 15 400 300 250 200

DA=double-acting (maintains the last position reached)

K503012401 E 9 400 300 250 200

K503012404 - 9 400 300 250 200

K503012405 I 9 400 300 250 200

218 Chain Conveyors

 SD – Stopper Damped
Damped stopping allows you to gently slow down
the first pallet. Damping prevents the workpiece
from slipping in a certain location. Electrical or
inductive sensors on the stoppers are optional. A
minimum mass of 3 kg is required to ensure proper
functioning. Damped or undamped stoppers can
be connected in the centre or on the sides.

They can be requested through inductive (I) or

electric (E) sensors. 5

75,9
6
98,4
Hub

8
38,8 / 44

86,5
78,5
H

40,15

40 60 101
35 7,5 85 8 44

SD 60 SD 100
SA=single-acting (locked in a depressurised state) SA=single-acting (locked in a depressurised state)
Ident. no. Stroke V=6 V=12 V=24 V=30 Ident. no. Stroke V=6 V=12 V=24 V=30
m/min m/min m/min m/min m/min m/min m/min m/min
Re- Re-
quest (mm) [kg] [kg] [kg] [kg] quest (mm) [kg] [kg] [kg] [kg]
K503021061 E 8 3-60 3-35 3-24 3-18 K503021101 - 8 3-100 3-60 3-40 3-30

K503021063 - 8 3-60 3-35 3-24 3-18 K503021102 I 8 3-100 3-60 3-40 3-30

K503021064 I 8 3-60 3-35 3-24 3-18

DA=double-acting (maintains the last position reached)
DA=double-acting (maintains the last position reached) K503022101 - 8 3-100 3-60 3-40 3-30

K503022061 E 8 3-60 3-35 3-24 3-18 K503022102 I 8 3-100 3-60 3-40 3-30

K503022063 - 9 3-60 3-35 3-24 3-18

The specifications apply for a friction coefficient of µ = 0.07
K503022064 I 10 3-60 3-35 3-24 3-18 Stoppers for heavier loads available upon request

The specifications apply for a friction coefficient of µ = 0.07

Stoppers for heavier loads available upon request

Chain Conveyors 219

 Application Examples

KTF-P 2010 with head drive AC with

drip pan and movable support frame

KTF-P 2010 with prism holders KTF-P 2010 with adjustable side rail
and clamp levers for workpieces
that frequently change in width

220 Chain Conveyors

 4

Three-line conveyor KTF-P 2010 Combination of belt conveyor

and chain conveyor with transverse rail
for simulating a floor obstacle

KTF-P 2040 with custom set-ups Indexing chain conveyor system TKU 2040
that allow the products to be mounted with prisms for carrying workpieces
horizontally for incline transport

Chain Conveyors 221

 Application Examples

Robot unloading point with damped stoppers,

pneumatic lifting feature with indexing from
above and RFID read/write head

Customer-specific pallet with Pallet with optional RFID transponder

corrosion-resistant design for cleaning systems

222 Chain Conveyors

 4

Station for four removal slots on a pallet with undamped stoppers and return stop.
Accumulated pallets are separated upstream of the station during the process using
damped stoppers on the buffer section.

System SRF-P 2012 as a heavy-duty version Intrinsically safe lift-and-turn station

with offset accumulating roller chain for pallets in interlinking production
in POM wear strips and stopper SU 800 cells in the automotive industry

Chain Conveyors 223

 Application Examples

Interlinking production cells in the automotive industry

Manual pallet stocking, removal with customer-supplied handling
system and robot. Lower return level with lift and shuttle.

Ready-for-use interlink with assembly automation

224 Chain Conveyors

 4

Lift and storage system for pallets Pallet circulation system for various
with two chain conveyors running in transport levels with three-axis gantry
opposite directions and pallet slots

Foolproof part pickup for left-sided Ready-for-use complete system

and right-sided products with melting furnace and PLC

Chain Conveyors 225

 Chapter 6 Flat Top Chain Conveyors

6 SBF-P 2254228 SBF-EMMA 236 Application Examples 238

Configuration 230
Modular Overview 231
Flat Top Chains 234

226 Flat Top Chain Conveyors

 6

Flat Top Chain Conveyors 227

 Flat Top Chain Conveyor SBF-P 2254

» Complex tracks running

in feeding and
interlinking applications. «

The SBF-P 2254 modular flat top chain conveyor

is ideally suited for feeding and interlink­ing bot­
6 tles, cans or small boxes in the food, beverage,
glass, pharmaceutical and paint industries. Its
modular design lets you create complex conveyor
systems quickly and economically, and it min­
imises the work required to make changes to suit
production conditions. The connecting elements
specially designed for this system allow you to
easily assemble the individual modules into a
complex conveyor system. In addition to straight
tracks, you can select from both sliding and
rolling curves of 90° and 180° as well as transfer
segments and inclines for bridging height differ­
ences.

Various flat top chains from different manufac-

turers can be delivered depending on your spe­
cific application. The slots on the sides of the
mk 2254 conveyor frame profile allow you to
connect side rails, stands, initiators and other
accessories. The chain is guided entirely inside
wear strips on both the upper and lower runs.

The flat top chain system is also available in

stainless steel to meet the special requirements
of the food industry.

228 Flat Top Chain Conveyors

Benefits of the SBF-P 2254

Ideally suited for the food, beverage, glass,

pharmaceutical and paint industries
For feeding and interlinking bottles, cans and
small boxes
Modular design for fast and affordable creation 6
of complex conveyor systems
Track layout can be easily changed according
to production conditions
Side slots on the conveyor frame profile for
attach­ing accessories such as side rails, stands,
etc.

Cross Section
conveyor width B = 100/130
chain width KB = 82,5/114,3

Profile mk 2254

Profile mk 2040.02

Wear Strip mk 1044/mk 1045

Flat Top Chain Conveyors 229

 Flat Top Chain Conveyor SBF-P 2254

Configuration
A variety of different influencing factors must be mk determines the motor power based on the individ­
taken into account when configuring flat top chain ual application. During configuration, note that the
conveyors. The total chain length, number of curves, direction (left/right) for the drive, transfer segments
workpiece characteristics and, above all, the weight and curves must always be specified in the running
and speed, etc. have a decisive influence on the direction (that is, the direction towards the drive).
motor power required.

6
i

o
e
q
y

u
w

q Tail
w Line
e Curve, sliding, right
r Curve, rolling, 180° left
t Curve, rolling, 90° left
y Transfer segment
u Drive
i Side rail
o Stand

230 Flat Top Chain Conveyors

SBF-P 2254 Modular Overview

The modules can only be ordered as spare parts and are not suitable for building a complete solution yourself.

Drive AC
Pitch diameter (D P)
Plastic chain 147.2 mm;
steel chain 141.2 mm
The motor can be positioned on the left (as shown) or
on the right. The motor power ranges from 0.25 to
0.55 kW. The conveyor system can achieve speeds of
approx. 8 to 40 m/min. Speeds below 8 m/min may
cause the chain to run unevenly. Only straight line ele-
ments are permitted to be integrated in the range of
L min = 600 mm.

Width B Chain width B1 Type Item no.

16
3
100 mm 82.5 mm Curved B01.00.409* 6
130 mm 114.3 mm Curved B01.00.410*
50 *Without profiles, without chain
0
Lm
in =
60
0

Tail
The tail consists of aluminium side plates with stain-
less steel covers and precisely guides the chain back
into the upper run through high-quality curved sec-
tions. Only straight line elements are permitted to be
integrated in the range of L min = 400 mm.

30
0
Lm Width B Chain width B1 Type Item no.
in =
40 100 mm 82.5 mm Curved B80.00.409*
0

130 mm 114.3 mm Curved B80.00.410*

*Without profiles, without chain

Line
The conveyor frame is based on the profile mk 2254
and features a high level of torsion resistance. The
chain is guided along the lower and upper run in PE
1000 wear strips.

Width B Chain width B1 Item no.

100 mm 82.5 mm B08.00.409*
130 mm 114.3 mm B08.00.410*
*Assemblies with connecting elements, without a chain
and without wear strips

Flat Top Chain Conveyors 231

 SBF-P 2254 Modular Overview

The modules can only be ordered as spare parts and are not suitable for building a complete solution yourself.

Curve, sliding
The chain is guided along the entire curve area in a
high-quality PE 1000 wear strip. The dimensions of the
wear strip ensure that the chain runs safely. This re-
sults in long conveyor service life. Sliding curves are
a primarily used in short conveyor systems with minimal
loads and low speeds.

Width B Chain width B1 R Item no.

100 mm 82.5 mm 300 mm B36.00.416*

6
100 mm 82.5 mm 500 mm B36.00.414*

130 mm 114.3 mm 300 mm B36.00.417*

130 mm 114.3 mm 610 mm B36.00.415*

Curve, rolling, 90°

The rolling curved tail and rotating plastic washers on
the inside of the curve significantly reduce the amount
of friction that occurs in the conveyor system. This
feature enables higher speeds, longer conveying paths
and higher loads to be achieved.

Width B Chain width B1 B2 R Item no.

100 mm 82.5 mm 500 mm 200 mm B36.00.428*

130 mm 114.3 mm 530 mm 200 mm B36.00.429*

Curve, rolling, 180°

The rolling curved tail and rotating plastic washers on
the inside of the curve significantly reduce the amount
of friction that occurs in the conveyor system. This
feature enables higher speeds, longer conveying paths
and higher loads to be achieved.

Width B Chain width B1 B2 R Item no.

100 mm 82.5 mm 500 mm 200 mm B36.00.430*

130 mm 114.3 mm 530 mm 200 mm B36.00.431*

*Assemblies with connecting elements, without a chain
and without wear strips

232 Flat Top Chain Conveyors

 Vertical Incline
The incline can be used to overcome height differ­
ences. Depending on the product, we recommend
using cleated chains to prevent the product from
slipping back. Like in the curve segments, wear strips
ensure that the chain runs safely and without much
a friction.

Width B Chain width B1 L Item no.

100 mm 82.5 mm 15° B36.00.434*

100 mm 82.5 mm 30° B36.00.435*

100 mm 82.5 mm 45° B36.00.436*
6
130 mm 114.3 mm 15° B36.00.438*
130 mm 114.3 mm 30° B36.00.439*
130 mm 114.3 mm 45° B36.00.440*
*Assemblies with connecting elements, without a chain

Transfer Segment
The tail consists of aluminium side plates with stain-
less steel covers and precisely guides the chain back
into the upper run through high-quality curved sec-
tions. Only straight line elements are permitted to be
integrated in the range of L min = 400 mm.

Width B Chain width B1 L Item no.

100 mm 82.5 mm 500 mm B37.00.002

130 mm 114.3 mm 500 mm B37.00.003

Wear Strips Section

mk wear strips made from polyethylene (PE 1000)
reduce friction and ensure that the flat top chain runs
securely. This results in a long conveyor service life.

Width B Chain width B1 L Item no.

100 mm 82.5 mm 2000 mm 22.44.2000

130 mm 114.3 mm 2000 mm 22.45.2000

Flat Top Chain Conveyors 233

 Flat Top Chains

The flat top chains presented in these tables are our proven standard. All the chains shown are FDA-
compliant. Plastic chains are not suitable for sharp-edge products or for cleaning with phosphoric/nitric
acid. Rather than selecting the right chain based on the permitted driving force, with mk you can use
our chain calculation program, which takes into account conveyor length, chain speed, back pressure,
lubrication, product type and weight to find the perfect chain for your specific application. Additional
chains are available on request.

Plastic Chains Designation Item no. Con- Chain R Perm. Mate- Cam
veyor width min oper- rial hardness
width [mm] [mm] ating
[mm] force [N]

6 LF 880 TAB-BO-K325 K114510031 100 82.5 200 1680

POM,
brown
POM,
LF 880 TAB-K325 K114510030 100 82.5 500 2100
brown
POM,
LF 880 TAB-BO-K450 K114510090 130 114.3 200 1680
brown
POM,
LF 880 TAB-K450 K114510085 130 114.3 500 2100
brown

POM,
WLF 880 TAB-BO-K325 K114510048 100 82.5 200 1680
white
POM,
WLF 880 TAB-BO-K450 K114510091 130 114.3 200 1680
white

With cam (not suitable for accumulated operation or lateral movement)

POM,
HFP 880 TAB-BOT-K325 K114510044 100 82.5 200 1680 60 Shore A
brown
POM,
HFP 879 TAB-BO-K450 K114510094 130 114.3 200 2100 60 Shore A
brown

Steel chains Designation Item no. Con- Chain R Perm. Material

veyor width min oper-
width [mm] [mm] ating
[mm] force [N]
Carbon steel,
S 881 TAB-K325 K114510047 100 82.5 500 8350
hardened
Carbon steel,
S 881 TAB-K450 K114510063 130 114.3 610 8350
hardened
Stainless steel,
SSR 8811 TAB-BO-K325 K114510022 100 82.5 200 4500
non-corrosive
Stainless steel,
SSC 8811 TAB-K450 K114510062 130 114.3 500 6000
non-corrosive

234 Flat Top Chain Conveyors

Notes

Flat Top Chain Conveyors 235

 Flat Top Chain Conveyor SBF-EMMA

» Modular conveyor system

available as a turnkey
solution or for you to build. «

The fully modular and standardised flat top

6 chain conveyors from our subsidiary EMMA
are an integral part of the mk portfolio. They
will replace the previous flat top chain con­
veyor SBF-P 2254 in the medium term.

The range of options is much greater com­

pared to the SBF-P 2254. The conveyor widths
for the system begin at 45 mm for products
starting from 10 mm wide and end at 295 mm
for products up to 400 mm wide. Combined
with the large selection of chains and cams,
the system is extremely flexible. As a result, it
lets you find practically any solution for every
application. It can also be used for gentle
transport and precise positioning with pallets.

EMMA flat top chain conveyors have seen

huge success in a wide variety of industry
applications in recent years and transport a
vast array of products to their destination
with maximum reliability.

You can find all our information and news

about EMMA flat top chain conveyors on our
website or at www.e-m-m-a.eu. You can also
find the comprehensive EMMA component
catalogue there.

-a.eu
www.e-m-m

236 Flat Top Chain Conveyors

Benefits of SBF-EMMA

Modular design with standardised

components 6
Easy to configure and cost-effective to
create
Can quickly be adapted to changed
production conditions
Very simple to extend or redeploy
Energy and space saving
S lots on the conveyor frame profile for
attaching accessories, side rails, etc.

Technical data
SBF-EMMA

Widths: 45 mm, 65 mm, 85 mm, 105 mm,

175 mm and 295 mm
Lengths: up to 40000 mm
Total load: up to 200 kg
S peed: up to 50 m/min

Flat Top Chain Conveyors 237

 Application Examples

SBF-P 2254 for transporting boxes before and after filling

Short vertical incline with side rail 180° curve element

238 Flat Top Chain Conveyors

 6

SBF-P 2254 as an interlink with a removal

and loading station for pallet holders

SBF-P 2254 with transfer pusher for the Transfer segment with side rail
packaging industry, for instance

Flat Top Chain Conveyors 239

 Application Examples

Multiple flat top chain conveyors on a shared conveyor

frame for transporting various classified goods

Double-line flat top chain conveyor Dual-line flat top chain conveyor with side rail SF 02
with one motor with adjustable guide height and width

240 Flat Top Chain Conveyors

 6

SBF-P 2254 with 90° sliding curve and steel flat top chain
as an interlinking device for shaft parts

Interlink with INOX flat top chain INOX flat top chain conveyor curve, sliding 90°
conveyor with rolling 180° curve

Flat Top Chain Conveyors 241

 Application Examples

Pallet system based on SBF EMMA A08 with separator

SBF EMMA with pressure rollers SBF EMMA with rolling curves and side rails
for vertical transport

242 Flat Top Chain Conveyors

 6

SBF EMMA with adjustable side rails SBF EMMA stainless steel conveyor with
automatically adjustable side rail ASTRRA

SBF EMMA as a parallel multi-line system SBF EMMA with custom separation function

Flat Top Chain Conveyors 243

 Chapter 7 Roller Conveyors

Selecting a Gravity Roller Conveyor Gravity Roller Conveyor

Roller Conveyor246 RBS-P 2065/2066248 RBS-P 2255252
Line250 Line254
7 Curve251 Curve255

Tangential Chain Roller Drive Roller Conveyor Rollers264

Conveyor RBT-P 2255256 RBM-P 2255260
Line258 Line262
Curve259 Curve263

244 Roller Conveyors

Application Examples266

Roller Conveyors 245

 Selecting a Roller Conveyor

Dimensions – Technical Data

Conveyor Conveyor Conveyor Total load* Speed ø of tails Reverse Accumu- Cycling
system widths lengths as standard, up to [mm] operation lated operation
[mm] [mm] up to [kg] [m/min] operation

Gravity roller conveyors

RBS-P 2065/2066 150–1050 200–5000** 400 30 approx. 90 • • •
RBS-P 2255 150–1050 500–10000** 400 30 approx. 90 • • •
Roller conveyor with tangential chain drive
RBT-P 2255 320–720 500–10000 400 30 approx. 90 • • •
Roller conveyor with drive roller
RBM-P 2255 480–680 500–10000 400 70 approx. 90 • • •
*Maximum load that is transported by the system in question with a standard configuration and for a standard application.
**Length refers to one roller conveyor segment (single piece). With the joints, there is no limit on the lengths that are possible.

7
Selecting the Roller Type Based on the Width and Load per Roller
For information
on rollers, see
Type 47/48/49/61 (ø 50 steel)
page 264 onwards
Type 45/46 (ø 50 steel)

Type 51/52/55/56 (ø 50 steel)

Type 43/44
(ø 50, plastic)

Type 59
(ø 40, plastic)

Type 58
(ø 20, plastic)

Conveyor width (approx.)

Roller installation length (EL)

Roller Spacing Based on the Product Length (LP)

LP

max. LP/3

p
Recommendation Minimum
4 rollers under the product 3 rollers under the product
≙ distribution p = 150 mm with LP = 600 mm ≙ distribution p = 200 mm with LP = 600 mm
Runs very smoothly Limit is m = 100 kg with 33 kg/roll
Can work with uneven loads Suitable for m = 50 kg with central centre of gravity for the load

246 Roller Conveyors

Application Options
Gravity roller conveyors (RBS) are often used for semi-automatic interlinking at picking stations or kanban
shelves. You can select rollers between ø 20 and 50 mm depending on your total load and the required
spacing. The RBS-P 2065 is the correct choice if you do not require the profile frame to act as a side rail –
as is the case with the RBS-P 2066 – or if the product is wider than the roller conveyor. A slope of 1 to 2°
is usually sufficient for conveying products with gravitational force. Please note that high speeds can be
reached with long lines and/or steeper slopes. This kinetic energy will require dampened deceleration.
Our roller conveyor tangential chain drive (RBT) is used wherever long conveying paths with a motorised
drive mechanism are required. The conveyor is driven by a ½" chain, which runs within an enclosed, low-
wear wear strip to tangentially drive the conveyor rollers from below via a sprocket wheel. It can be used
to drive conveying paths up to 10 m long. The chain tail is equipped with idler pulleys supported by ball
bearings for minimal friction losses.
Roller conveyors with a drive roller (RBM) allow you to drive up to nine additional rollers using the round
belt. They are notable for their few obstructing edges and easy-to-clean design, making them well suited
for clean environments and increased sanitary requirements. They are also available in an IP66 version on
request, or with an electronic holding brake for upward and downward gradients. 7
Rollers with a friction drive are available for dynamic buffering tracks. These rollers reduce back pressure,
and the roller remains stationary under the product without any relative motion (bi-directional friction pre-
ferred if the load distribution is uncertain). Adjustable friction rollers are particularly useful for lightweight
products. Gripping of the product can be increased up to the adhesion limit between the product and the
roller. This is used, for example, for high acceleration, for inclines or for positioning the product.

Necessary Effective Width NB of a Curve Based on the Product Dimensions

Additional requirement (X) for

conveyor width (B) for straight
sections when connecting to
curves:
RBS-/RBM-P 2255: X = 98 mm
RBT-P 2255: X = 125 mm

Examples for Curve Radius Ri = 800 mm

BP [mm] NB = effective width
NB = 600 BP = product width
500
LP = product length
NB = 500
400
NB = 400
300

200 NB = 300

100 NB = 200

0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 LP [mm]

Roller Conveyors 247

 Gravity Roller Conveyor RBS-P 2065/2066

»sections
Straight and curved
for transporting
products of low
to moderate weight. «
The roller conveyor system with gravity drive
(RBS) is typically used in industrial automation
for semi-automatic interlinking at picking stations
or kanban shelves. The difference between the
7 RBS-P 2065 and 2066 roller conveyors is that the
RBS-P 2066’s conveyor frame profile serves as
the side rail, while in the RBS-P 2065 the rollers
protrude beyond the side profiles, making the
system suitable for extra-wide products and
lateral discharging.

An extensive selection of different roller types

makes the system extremely flexible and suitable
for a wide range of applications. The conveyors
are available in both straight and curved configu-
rations. The roller diameters of 20, 40 or 50 mm
ensure that both large and small workpieces can
be transported reliably and without interruption.
The longitudinal slots in the profile beams can be
used to attach side rails, stands, initiators and
other accessories.

Products can be transported along a downward

gradient either by hand or using gravitational
force. A slope of 1 to 2° is usually sufficient for
conveying products with gravitational force.
Please note that high speeds can be reached with
long lines and/or steeper slopes. This kinetic
energy will require dampened deceleration.

248 Roller Conveyors

Benefits of the
RBS-P 2065/2066

For transporting products of low to moderate weight

 emi-automatic interlinking at picking stations or
S
even kanban shelves
 onveyor frame profile of the RBS-P 2066 functions
C
as the side rail 7
 onveyor frame profile of the RBS-P 2065 allows for
C
extra-wide product and lateral discharging
 ide slots on the conveyor frame profile for attaching
S
accessories such as side rails, stands, etc.

Cross Section
B ≙ conveyor width
usable width B-50

B ≙ conveyor width

Profile mk 2065 Profile mk 2066

Roller Conveyors 249

 RBS-P 2065/2066 Straight Section

Properties
A feature of the gravity roller conveyors RBS-P 2065 and 2066 is that the rollers protrude over the profile
edge with conveyor frame profile 2065 (making them suitable for extra-wide product). In addition, the
conveyor frame profile on the RBS-P 2066 serves as a side rail.

ø 20: B61.00.001 / ø 40: B61.00.002/ø 50: B61.00.003

B ≙ conveyor width

mk 2065

7
Usable width = B-50

mk 2066

Technical data
Conveyor ø 20, plastic 150, 200, 250, 300 and 350 mm Ident. no.: B61.00.001
width B ø 40, plastic 150, 200, 250, 300 and 350 mm Ident. no.: B61.00.002
ø 50, plastic 250, 350, 450, 550 and 650 mm Ident. no.: B61.00.003
ø 50, galv. steel 250–1050 mm in 100 mm increments Ident. no.: B61.00.003
Conveyor length L 200–5000 mm

Spacing p ø 20 25, 50 and 75 mm A = 12.5 mm

ø 40 50, 75, 100 and 125 mm A = 25 mm
ø 50 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 and 250 mm A = 25 mm

Conveyor frame profile mk 2065 or mk 2066

Roller types Type 43–46, 58 and 59 from p. 264

Stand from p. 280

Load capacity, usual depending on the conveyor width and higher on request
conveyor roller, up to 100 kg/m
and a total load capacity of 400 kg

250 Roller Conveyors

RBS-P 2066 Curve

Properties
The gravity roller conveyor 2066 has an impressively simple design. The conical conveyor rollers that
it uses prevent the transported product from twisting on the conveyor.

B61.00.004

B ≙ conveyor width
Usable width = B-50

Technical data
Conveyor width B 310–860 mm in 50 mm increments

Inner radius RI 800 (with B = 360, 460, 560, 660, 760, 860)
850 (with B = 310, 410, 510, 610, 710, 810)
Conveying angle 90° others on request

Conveyed product length 150 200 250 300 350 450 550
recommended number of rollers 21 17 15 13 11 10 9
Conveyor frame profile mk 2066

Roller types Type 47 and 48 from p. 264

Stand from p. 280

Load capacity, standard depending on the conveyor width higher on request

and conveyor roller, up to 100 kg/90°

Roller Conveyors 251

 Gravity Roller Conveyor RBS-P 2255

» Straight and
curved sections for
transporting products
of moderate weight. «
The roller conveyor system with gravity drive
(RBS) is typically used in industrial applications
7 for semi-automatic interlinking at picking sta­
tions, on buffering tracks, in interim storage or
in assembly lines. Products can be transported
along a downward gradient either by hand or
using gravitational force. The sturdier mk 2255
profile makes the RBS-P 2255 gravity roller con-
veyor suitable for heavier loads than the RBS-P
2065/66 system.

The gravity roller conveyor is available in both

straight and curved configurations and can be
combined with driven roller conveyors (RBT and
RBM). All roller conveyors are built from the mk
2255 roller conveyor profile, which includes longi-
tudinal slots in the profile beams for attaching
side rails, stands, initiators and other accesso-
ries.

Products can be transported along a downward

gradient either by hand or using gravitational
force. A slope of 1 to 2° is usually sufficient for
conveying products with gravitational force.
Please note that high speeds can be reached
with long lines and/or steeper slopes. This kinetic
energy will require dampened deceleration.

252 Roller Conveyors

Benefits of RBS-P 2255

For transporting products of moderate weight

 emi-automatic interlinking at picking
S
stations, on buffering tracks, in interim
storage or in assembly lines
 k 2255 conveyor frame profile allows for
m
combination with driven roller conveyors
(RBT, RBM)
 ide slots on the conveyor frame profile for
S
attaching accessories such as side rails,
7
stands, etc.

Cross Section

B ≙ conveyor width
usable width B-88

Profile mk 2255
with optional profile mk 2040.85
Wear strip mk 1025.75

Roller Conveyors 253

 RBS-P 2255 Straight Section

Properties
The gravity roller conveyor is based on the mk 2255 profile. The anodised conveyor frame profiles are
designed for spacings of 75, 100 and 125 mm, and a roller diameter of 50 mm.

B61.02.001

5 L 5 B ≙ conveyor width
Usable width = B-88

40

120
7 ø50

p p/2
40
44

Technical data
Roller diameter 50 mm, plastic/galv. steel

Conveyor width B 290, 390, 490, 590 and 690 mm

Conveyor length L 500–10000 mm

Spacing p 75, 100 and 125 mm

Conveyor frame profile mk 2255

Roller types plastic 43 + 44 or steel 45 + 46 from p. 264

Stand only with conveyor stand option variant D from p. 280

Load capacity, standard depending on the conveyor width and conveyor roller, up higher on
to 100 kg/m and a total load capacity of 400 kg request

254 Roller Conveyors

RBS-P 2255 Curved Section

Properties
The gravity roller conveyor is based on the mk 2255 profile. The anodised conveyor frame profiles are
designed for a 5° spacing and a roller diameterof 50 mm.

B61.02.002

B ≙ conveyor width
Usable width = B-88

Technical data
Roller diameter 50 mm, conical, made from plastic

Conveyor width B 390, 490, 590 and 690 mm

Inner radius RI 800 mm

Conveying angle 90° (others available on request)

Spacing 5°/number: 18 rollers

Conveyor frame profile mk 2255

Roller types type 47 and 48 from p. 264

Stand only with conveyor stand option variant D from p. 280

Load capacity, standard depending on the conveyor width higher on

and conveyor roller, up to 100 kg/90° request

Roller Conveyors 255

 Tangential Chain Roller Conveyor RBT-P 2255

» Straight and curved

sections, suitable for even
dirty or oily environments. «
7
The RBT-P 2255 tangential chain roller conveyor
is used wherever long conveying paths with a
motorised drive mechanism are required. The
conveyor is driven by a ½" chain, which runs
within an enclosed, low-wear wear strip to
tangentially drive the conveyor rollers from
below via a sprocket wheel. This allows you to
achieve conveying paths up to 10 m in length
and makes the system suitable for even dirty
or oily environments.

The chain tail is also equipped with idler pulleys

supported by ball bearings for minimal friction
losses. The tangential chain roller conveyor is
available in both straight and curved configura­
tions and can be combined with other roller
conveyors (RBS and RBM). The longitudinal slots
in the beam profiles can be used to attach side
rails, stands, initiators and other accessories.

256 Roller Conveyors

Benefits of RBT-P 2255

Driven by a tangential chain

For transporting products of moderate weight
For conveying paths up to 10 m long
S uitable for even dirty or oily environments
 k 2255 conveyor frame profile allows for com-
m
bination with RBS and RBM roller conveyors
 ide slots on the conveyor frame profile for at-
S
taching accessories such as side rails, stands, 7
etc.

Cross Section
B ≙ conveyor width
usable width B-115

Profile mk 2255

with optional profile mk 2040.85

Profile mk 2040.40

Roller Conveyors 257

 RBT-P 2255 Straight Section

Properties
The tangential chain roller conveyor is based on the mk 2255 profile. The anodised conveyor frame profiles
are designed for a spacing of 100 mm and a roller diameter of 50 mm.

B61.02.003

B ≙ conveyor width
Usable width = B-115

½" chain; Z = 14; Dw = 57.07 mm

Technical data
Roller diameter 50 mm, made from galvanised steel

Conveyor width B 320, 420, 520, 620 and 720 mm others on request

Conveyor length L 600–10000 mm others on request

Spacing p 100 mm (optionally 75, 150, 200) others on request

Conveyor frame profile mk 2255

Roller types type 49 and 57, 60 or 61 from p. 264

Speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stand only with conveyor stand option variant D from p. 280

Load capacity, standard depending on the conveyor width and conveyor roller, up higher on
to 100 kg/m and a total load capacity of 400 kg request

258 Roller Conveyors

RBT-P 2255 Curved Section

Properties
The curve builds on the straight line with a cylindrical ø 50 mm roller. The curve is fitted with conical
elements based on the radii. The speed specifications refer to the middle of the conveyor. For quiet
running, the rollers in the standard version are designed with a 5% partition.

B61.02.004

B ≙ conveyor width
Usable width = B-115

Technical data
Roller diameter 50 mm, conical, made from plastic

Conveyor width B 420, 520, 620 and 720 mm

Inner radius RI 800 mm

Conveying angle 90° others on request

Spacing 5°/number: 18 rollers

Conveyor frame profile mk 2255

Roller types type 50 from p. 264

Speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stand only with conveyor stand option variant D from p. 280

Load capacity, standard depending on the conveyor width higher on

and conveyor roller, up to 100 kg/90° request

Roller Conveyors 259

 Drive Roller Conveyor RBM-P 2255

» Straight and curved

sections for variable
speeds and with a
start/stop function. «
The drive roller in the RBM-P 2255 drive roller
conveyor allows you to drive up to nine addi­tional
7 rollers using the round belt. By segmenting the
drive mechanisms in this way, this type of roller
conveyor allows you to implement different
speeds or start/stop functions within a single
conveying path. This gives you the ability to
separate, stop and buffer product, allowing you
to achieve even complex material flows when
combined with appropriate control technology.
A control module controls the speed and direc-
tion of rotation.

The RBM-P 2255 roller conveyor is notable for its

few obstructing edges and easy-to-clean design,
making it well suited for clean environments and
increased sanitary requirements. It is also avail­
able in an IP66 version on request, or with an
electronic holding brake for upward and down-
ward gradients.

The roller conveyor is available in both straight

and curved configurations and can be combined
with other roller conveyors (RBS and RBT). The
longitudinal slots in the beam profiles can be
used to attach side rails, stands, initiators and
other accessories.

260 Roller Conveyors

Benefits of RBM-P 2255

Powered by a drive roller

For transporting products of moderate weight
 quipped with a round belt for driving up to
E
9 additional rollers
 ifferent speeds or start/stop functions
D
possible in a single conveying path
 ew obstructing edges and maximum conveyor
F
width 7
 k 2255 conveyor frame profile allows for com-
m
bination with RBS and RBT roller conveyors
 ide slots on the conveyor frame profile for
S
attach­ing accessories such as side rails, stands,
etc.

Cross Section
B ≙ conveyor width
usable width B-88

Profile mk 2255
with optional profile mk 2040.85
Wear strip mk 1025.75

Roller Conveyors 261

 RBM-P 2255 Straight Section

Properties
The drive roller conveyor is based on the mk 2255 profile. The anodised conveyor frame profiles are de­
signed for a spacing of 100 mm and a roller diameter of 50 mm. A maximum of five rollers per drive roller
are connected and driven by round belts upstream and downstream of the drive roller. We recommend
using one drive roller per metre with the spacing p = 100 mm.

B61.02.005

B ≙ conveyor width
Usable width = B-88

Technical data
Roller diameter 50 mm, made from galvanised steel

Conveyor width B 480, 580 and 680 mm others on request

Conveyor length L 500–10000 mm

Spacing p 100 mm

Conveyor frame profile mk 2255

Roller types type 51, 55 and 66 from p. 264

Speed up to 70 m/min p. 12

Stand only with conveyor stand option variant D from p. 280

Load capacity, standard depending on the gear ratio of the drive rollers i=9:1 for 6–70 m/min: 3 kg
and number of installed drives, max. 100 kg/m i=16:1 for 4–60 m/min: 5 kg
i=48:1 for 1.5–20 m/min: 15 kg
i=96:1 for 0.6–9 m/min: 30 kg

262 Roller Conveyors

RBM-P 2255 Curved Section

Properties
The curve builds on the straight line with a cylindrical ø 50 mm roller. The curve is fitted with conical ele-
ments based on the radii. The speed specifications refer to the middle of the conveyor. For quiet running,
the rollers in the standard version are designed with a 5% partition.

B61.02.006

B ≙ conveyor width
Usable width = B-180

Technical data
Roller diameter 50 mm, conical, made from plastic

Conveyor width B 480, 580 and 680 mm

Inner radius RI 800 mm

Spacing 5°/number: 18 rollers

Conveyor frame profile mk 2255

Roller types type 52, 56 and 67 from p. 264

Speed up to 30 m/min p. 12

Stand only with conveyor stand option variant D from p. 280

Load capacity, standard depending on the conveyor width and conveyor roller, higher on
up to 55 kg/90° request

Roller Conveyors 263

 Rollers

Gravity rollers are non-driven support rollers. They are used for universal roller conveyors where products
are transported by hand or using gravity on downward gradients.

Gravity Rollers for RBS-P 2065/2066 and RBS-P 2255, Cylindrical

Usable
Roller ø Colour Material Mounting Friction Load/roll
width*
Type 43 50 mm Grey B-50 | B-88 Plastic M8 female thread - 7–35 kg

Type 44 50 mm Grey B-50 | B-88 Plastic Spring axle, ø 8 mm - 7–35 kg

Type 45 50 mm Silver B-50 | B-88 Galv. steel M8 female thread - 35 kg

Type 46 50 mm Silver B-50 | B-88 Galv. steel Spring axle, ø 8 mm - 35 kg

Type 58 20 mm Grey B-50 | B-88 Plastic Spring axle, ø 6 mm - 1–8 kg

Type 59 40 mm Grey B-50 | B-88 Plastic Spring axle, ø 8 mm - 10–18 kg

7 Type 64 20 mm Silver B-50 | B-88 Stainless steel Spring axle, ø 6 mm - 9 kg

Gravity Rollers for RBS-P 2065/2066 and RBS-P 2255, Conical

Usable
Roller ø Colour Material Mounting Friction Load/roll
width*
Type 47 50 mm Grey B-50 | B-88 Plastic M8 female thread - 40 kg

Type 48 50 mm Grey B-50 | B-88 Plastic Spring axle, ø 8 mm - 40 kg

*For RBS-P 2065 and RBS-P 2066 | RBS-P 2255

Rollers driven by a tangential chain are suitable for loads with a low to moderate weight.
They are suitable for dirty or oily environments.

Driven Rollers with Sprocket Wheel for RBT-P 2255, Cylindrical

Usable
Roller ø Colour Material Mounting Friction Load/roll
width
Type 49 50 mm Silver B-115 Galv. steel M8 female thread - 40 kg

Type 57* 50 mm Silver B-115 Galv. steel M8 female thread One end 30 kg

Type 60* 50 mm Silver B-115 Galv. steel M8 female thread Both ends 30 kg

Type 61* 50 mm Silver B-115 Galv. steel M8 female thread Adjustable 40 kg

Driven Rollers with Sprocket Wheel for RBT-P 2255, Conical

Usable
Roller ø Colour Material Mounting Friction Load/roll
width
Type 50 50 mm Grey B-115 Plastic M8 female thread - 40 kg
*Friction rollers can be used only with conveyed products with a smooth and firm surface

264 Roller Conveyors

Drive rollers are rollers that provide a maximum usable width and minimal obstructing edges.
Separately driven sections allow for different speeds and start/stop functions.

Drive Rollers for RBM-P 2255, Cylindrical

Usable
Roller ø Colour Material Mounting Friction Load/roll
width*
M8 female thread,
Type 66* 50 mm Silver B-88 Galv. steel - 30 kg
M12x1 male thread

Drive Rollers for RBM-P 2255, Conical

Usable
Roller ø Colour Material Mounting Friction Load/roll
width*
M8 female thread,
Type 67* 50 mm Grey B-180 Plastic - 30 kg
M12x1 male thread
7
Rollers for RBM-P 2255, Cylindrical
Usable
Roller ø Colour Material Mounting Friction Load/roll
width*

Type 51 50 mm Silver B-88 Galv. steel M8 female thread - 30 kg

Type 55 50 mm Silver B-88 Galv. steel Spring axle, ø 8 mm - 30 kg

Rollers for RBM-P 2255, Conical

Usable
Roller ø Colour Material Mounting Friction Load/roll
width*

Type 52 50 mm Grey B-180 Plastic M8 female thread - 30 kg

Type 56 50 mm Grey B-180 Plastic Spring axle, ø 8 mm - 30 kg

*Drive roller with 450 mm cable including plug. Cable can be extended up to 10 m. Speed of the motorized roller regulated by drive
control. Drive control and extension cable must be ordered separately.

Drive control for drive rollers Order designation

Rated voltage 24 V DC, voltage range 18–26 V, rated
 K106 /... /....
current 2 A, max. 5 A, degree of protection IP 54.
Ident. no.
Also available in IP 20 on request, for installation in
Roller type (e.g. type 57 = 057)
control cabinets. Includes fastening accessories.
Installation length EL (e.g. 450 mm = 0450)
Drive control for drive rollers, type 66 B46.10.001
Drive control for drive rollers, type 67 B46.10.002
Installation length EL
Extension cable (2 m) K106066VK54 Usable width
(max. 5 x 2 m per drive roller permitted)

Roller Conveyors 265

 Application Examples

Kanban workstation with RBS-P 2065

gravity conveyors for feeding products

Gravity roller conveyor Gravity roller conveyor

RBS-P 2066 with 45° curve RBS-P 2065 with 12° incline

266 Roller Conveyors

 3

Roller conveyor RBT-P 2066 with vertical shaft drive

and diagonal rollers for centring the workpiece on one side

Gravity roller conveyor RBS-P 2066 with height- Gravity roller conveyor RBS-P 2065 as feed
adjustable stand and angle plate as side rail and discharge conveyor for laundry baskets

Roller Conveyors 267

 Application Examples

Friction roller conveyor RBT-P 2255 with oscillating conveyor

operating as a lift for returning empty baskets

RBS-P 2255 with drip pan and integrated RBS-P 2255 with
discharge chute below the conveyor plastic rollers with ø 40 mm

268 Roller Conveyors

 3

RBS-P 2255 as parallel provisioning conveyor for removal by a robot

Transport belt combination RBT-P 2255 Combination of rotary table and

with integrated lift-and-transfer conveyor RBT-P 2255 with buffer table for picking tasks
and ø 50 mm steel rollers

Roller Conveyors 269

 Application Examples

RBT-P 2255 with integrated lift-and-transfer conveyor, 100 kg/m

load capacity with additional side rail and drip pan

RBT-P 2255 as 90° curve Driven curved roller conveyor RBT-P 2255 90°

270 Roller Conveyors

 3

RBM-P 2255 drive roller conveyor as a lift-and-transfer conveyor with control

module, with belt discharge via RBS-P 2065 gravity roller conveyor

Interlink with RBM-P 2255 driven roller conveyors and

RBS-P 2066 gravity roller conveyors for mail crates

Roller Conveyors 271

 Chapter 8 Rotary Tables

Rotary Tables Application Examples276

DTZ-P 2040 274

272 Rotary Tables

 8

Rotary Tables 273

 Rotary Table DTZ-P 2040

Technical data
Rotary table Ø D1 = 750, 1000, 1250, 1500 mm others on request

Rotary table top p. 275

Drive version chain special designs available on request

v const (U/min) 1 – 8 U/min others on request

Load 100 kg

Side rails on request

Height H H = 500 – 1500 mm others on request

274 Rotary Tables

Table Tops Infeed and Discharge Designs
The table tops listed below are standard versions. The designs below are standard versions that can
Special versions are available on request. be combined. For all the designs, you can choose
either clockwise or anti-clockwise rotation.

When designing diverters, the weight and shape

Variant 1.1 of the product being conveyed plays a major role.
Laminated top mk therefore creates the technical design of the
diverters based on the customer’s specific require-
ments. With extensive experience in interlinking
Variant 1.2 and conveying applications, mk can draw on a
Laminated top wealth of previously implemented solutions. For
With VA steel shelf example, we can implement adjustable diverter
plates that are integrated into the control system.
Variant 1.3
Laminated top
with protruding
VA steel shelf
(for short workpieces)
Design A 8

Design B
Left slide bed

Design C
Right slide bed

Design D
Central slide bed

Sample order
DTZ-P 2040 Design C

D1 = 1000 mm

H = 800 mm

Table top variant 1.1

v = 2 U/min anti-clockwise rotation

Rotary Tables 275

 Application Examples

8 Rotary table with timing belt drive (ø 2000 mm),

application in the pharmaceutical industry

Rotary table with additional custom add-on Rotary table with covered support frame

276 Rotary Tables

Lightweight and cost-efficient mobile rotary table Rotary table with timing belt drive and 8
belt conveyor, all with electrical height adjustment
using the telescopic column

Rotary table with friction belt drive Rotary table with direct drive, stainless steel sheet
around the perimeter and single-track discharge

Rotary Tables 277

 Chapter 9 Conveyor Technology Accessories

Stands Side Rails Nuts300

Stand Versions and Conveyor Fixed Side Rails 294
Stand Fastening Elements 280 Adjustable Side Rails 295
Pad Options 281 Individual Components  297
Single Stands 282
Stand, Lightweight 285
Stand, Medium-Weight 289
9 Stand, Heavy-Duty 293

278 Conveyor Technology Accessories

Electrical Components Other Accessories Application Examples306
Reglomats302 End Stops 304
Initiators303 Drip Pan 305

Conveyor Technology Accessories 279

 Stands

Stand Versions Conveyor Stand Fastening

mk delivers the right stand system for every type Elements
of conveyor. For system stability, please take into
The conveyor stand fastening elements connect
account the ratio of height to width, the centre of
the conveyor to the stand. Various fastening
gravity of the load and other influences. We would
elements with different adjustment angles can
be happy to advise you on the optimal configuration,
be selected.
or you can use our online configurator
(www.quickdesigner.com).

Example of a single stand Example of fastening variant A, 20°

9
Example of a height-adjustable stand Example of fastening variant B, 45°

Example of a stand with a special design Example of fastening variant C, 60°

280 Conveyor Technology Accessories

 Pad Options
A variety of pad options are available depending on
the stand that is selected. Examples include level-
ling feet, floor plates for anchoring or fixed castors
and swivel casters.

Example of fixed and swivel casters, type A

Example of a floor plate

Foot plate, 50.02.0063

Anchor HSA, M10 x 120, K111030011

Fixed caster, K106001044
Countersunk head screw, M10 x 25, D79911025

Floor plate, 50.02.0025

Example of a levelling foot, ø79 M16

Threaded insert M8,

9S20K, K112030008
Ribbed washer ø 8.4,
galv. FSt, K111010017
Cylinder head screw M8 x 20,
D0912820
Plate for levelling foot,
50.02.0032
Levelling foot, ø79 M16,
B67.02.002

Conveyor Technology Accessories 281

 Stands

Single Stands
Stand 54.80
Single stand with profile mk 2040.41 for conveyors
up to 250 mm wide. Can be used for belt conveyors
GUF-P MINI and GUF-P 2000 and modular belt con-
veyor MBF-P 2040.
Ident. no. B67.04.080

Standard heights:
H 500 mm
H 750 mm
H 1000 mm
H 1250 mm
H 1500 mm

Stand 51.2
Single stand with profile mk 2004 for conveyors
up to 250 mm wide. Can be used for belt conveyors
GUF-P MINI, GUF-P 2000 and MBF-P 2040.
Ident. no. B67.04.002

Standard heights:
H 500 mm
H 750 mm
H 1000 mm
H 1250 mm
H 1500 mm

282 Conveyor Technology Accessories

 Single Stands
Floor fastening element for single stand
As floor fastening elements for single stands,
base plates ensure stability, come with a black
paint finish as standard and have a defined drilling
pattern for facilitating anchoring to the floor.

Base Plate 7, 50.02.0089 Base Plate 1, 50.02.0023

Grey cast-iron material, painted black Grey cast-iron material, painted matt black

Adjusting screw DIN 916, 8.8 galv.,

M16 x 60, D09161660
Anchor HSA, M10 x 120, Adjusting screw DIN 916, 8.8 galv.,
K111030011 M16 x 40, D09161640
Anchor HSA, M10 x 120,
K111030011

Conveyor Technology Accessories 283

 Stands

Single Stands
Stand 52.5
Height of single stand can be adjusted with
mk 2000 profile. Can be used for flat top chain
conveyor SBF-P 2254.

Ident. no. B67.05.008

Standard heights:
H 500 mm – 1500 mm
± 50 mm

Standard width:
B 100 mm
B 130 mm
B 205 mm

284 Conveyor Technology Accessories

Stand, Lightweight
Stand 55.1
Lightweight stand in simple H design with
mk 2040.40 profile (light duty). Can be used for
virtually all conveyor systems, except curved
conveyors and incline conveyors.

Ident. no. B67.06.011

Standard heights:
H 500 mm
H 750 mm
H 1000 mm
H 1200 mm

Standard width:
B = 200 – 1200 mm

Conveyor Technology Accessories 285

 Stands

Stand, Lightweight
Stand 53.1
Lightweight height-adjustable stand in H design
with mk 2001 profile. Can be used for virtually all
conveyor systems, except curved conveyors and
incline conveyors.

Ident. no. B67.06.001

Standard heights with adjustment range:

H 325 mm ± 25 mm
H 400 mm ± 50 mm
H 550 mm ± 100 mm
H 700 mm ± 150 mm

Standard width:
Variant A Variant B B = 200 – 800 mm

For H 700 mm or higher,

uses 2 traverses

9
Variant C Variant D

286 Conveyor Technology Accessories

 Stand, Lightweight
Stand 53.11
Lightweight height-adjustable stand with base
traverse in H design with mk 2001 profile. Can be
used for virtually all conveyor systems, except
curved conveyors and incline conveyors. The stand
is suitable for fixed casters and swivel casters.

Ident. no. B67.06.002

Standard heights with adjustment range:

H 400 mm ± 25 mm
H 450 mm ± 25 mm
H 500 mm ± 50 mm
H 600 mm ± 50 mm
H 700 mm ± 100 mm
Variant A Variant B H 800 mm ± 150 mm

Standard width:
B = 100 – 500 mm

9
Variant C Variant D

Conveyor Technology Accessories 287

 Stands

Stand, Lightweight
Stand 53.11, Mobile
Lightweight height-adjustable stand with base
traverse in mobile H design with mk 2001 profile.
Can be used for virtually all conveyor systems,
except curved conveyors and incline conveyors.

Ident. no. B67.06.100

Standard heights with adjustment range:

H 600 mm ± 25 mm
H 700 mm ± 50 mm
H 800 mm ± 100 mm

Standard width:
B = 100 – 500 mm
Variant A Variant B

9
Variant C Variant D

288 Conveyor Technology Accessories

 Stand, Medium-Weight
Stand 53.2
Medium-weight height-adjustable stand in H
design with mk 2014 profile. Can be used for
virtually all conveyor systems, except curved
conveyors and incline conveyors.

Ident. no. B67.06.003

Standard heights with adjustment range:

H 325 mm ± 25 mm
H 400 mm ± 50 mm
H 550 mm ± 100 mm
H 700 mm ± 150 mm
H 850 mm ± 200 mm
H 1000 mm ± 200 mm
Variant A Variant B H 1200 mm ± 200 mm

Standard width:
B = 200 – 1500 mm

For H 700 mm or higher, 9

Variant C Variant D
uses 2 traverses

Conveyor Technology Accessories 289

 Stands

Stand, Medium-Weight
Stand 53.21
Medium-weight height-adjustable stand with base
traverse in H design with mk 2014 profile. Can
be used for virtually all conveyor systems, except
curved conveyors and incline conveyors. The stand
is suitable for fixed casters and swivel casters.

Ident. no. B67.06.004

Standard heights with adjustment range:

H 400 mm ± 25 mm
H 450 mm ± 25 mm
H 500 mm ± 50 mm
H 600 mm ± 50 mm
H 700 mm ± 100 mm
Variant A Variant B H 800 mm ± 150 mm
H 1000 mm ± 200 mm
H 1200 mm ± 200 mm

Standard width:
9 B = 200 – 800 mm
Variant C Variant D

290 Conveyor Technology Accessories

 Stand, Medium-Weight
Stand 53.21, Mobile
Medium-weight height-adjustable stand with
base traverse in mobile H design with mk 2014
profile. Can be used for virtually all conveyor
systems, except curved conveyors and incline
conveyors.

Ident. no. B67.06.101

Standard heights with adjustment range:

H 600 mm ± 25 mm
H 700 mm ± 50 mm
H 800 mm ± 100 mm
H 1000 mm ± 150 mm
H 1200 mm ± 200 mm
Variant A Variant B
Standard width:
B = 200 – 800 mm

9
Variant C Variant D

Conveyor Technology Accessories 291

 Stands

Stand, Medium-Weight
Stand 53.32
Medium-weight height-adjustable stand with base
traverse in H design with mk 2014 profile. Can
be used for virtually all conveyor systems, except
curved conveyors and incline conveyors.

Ident. no. B67.06.016

Standard heights with adjustment range:

H 450 mm ± 25 mm
H 500 mm ± 50 mm
H 600 mm ± 50 mm
H 700 mm ± 100 mm
H 800 mm ± 150 mm
H 1000 mm ± 200 mm

Standard width:
Variant A Variant B Variant C B = 300 –1000 mm
B1 = B-10
B2 = 460, 660 mm
9

292 Conveyor Technology Accessories

 Stand, Heavy-Duty
Stand 31
Heavy-duty height-adjustable stand in H design
with mk 2031 profile. Can be used for virtually all
conveyor systems, except curved conveyors and
incline conveyors.

Ident. no. B67.03.002

Standard heights with adjustment range:

H 325 mm ± 25 mm
H 400 mm ± 50 mm
H 550 mm ± 100 mm
H 700 mm ± 150 mm
H 850 mm ± 200 mm
H 1000 mm ± 250 mm
H 1150 mm ± 300 mm
H 1500 mm ± 300 mm
Variant B H 2000 mm ± 300 mm

Standard width:
B = 500 – 2000 mm 9
For H 1150 mm
or higher,
uses 2 traverses

Conveyor Technology Accessories 293

 Side Rails

Fixed Side Rails

Side Rail SF1.3 B17.00.003

H = 10–100 mm

The length of this side rail is limited to

H
the length of the slide bed and is there-
fore shorter than the conveyor length L.
It cannot be removed.

Only available for belt conveyors!

Side Rail SF2.1 B17.00.004

L1 = 25, 50, 75 mm

Side Rail SF2.2 B17.00.005

L1 = 25, 50, 75 mm

294 Conveyor Technology Accessories

Adjustable Side Rails
Side rail SF01 B17.00.101

Separate holder HSF01

B27.01.001

L14 = 50, 75, 100 mm

L16
L16 = 75, 100, 150, 200 mm

Side rail SF02 B17.00.102

Separate holder HSF02

B27.01.002

L12 = 50, 75, 100, 150 mm

L13 = 25, 50 mm
9

Side rail SF03 B17.00.103

Separate holder HSF03

B27.01.003

L16 = 100, 150, 200

Side Rail Strips

Type 01 Type 11 Type 12 Type 21 Type 22 Type 23 Type 24
B17.01.013 B17.01.017 B17.01.018 B17.01.010 B17.01.014 B17.01.015 B17.01.016

Conveyor Technology Accessories 295

 Side Rails

Adjustable Side Rail for SBF-P 2254

Side rail for flat top chain conveyor

System SF10.1 B17.00.020

for straight section

System SF10.2 B17.00.021

for curved section

296 Conveyor Technology Accessories

 Individual Components
Clamps for round rods
Material: Tumbled aluminium

Clamp
30.00.0002

Side walls for round rods

Clamp
Material: Tumbled aluminium 30.00.0001

For 10 mm slot width

Side wall
34.09.0003
9
Clamp
30.00.0017

For 7 mm slot width

Side wall
34.09.0004
Short clamp
30.00.0038

Clamp, right
M8
30.00.0013

Clamp, left
30.00.0047
M8

Conveyor Technology Accessories 297

 Side Rails

Individual Components
Swivel Clamps
Swivel clamps allow for a wide variety of angle and
height connections for the guide rods.

Clamp
mk 2522

PA6GF 30%,
glass fibre reinforced

M8

Clamp
30.00.0024

stainless steel 1.4305

Stainless steel clamp, 30.00.0023

9 Plastic clamp, mk 2522

Cylinder head screw M8 x 20, Clamp

D0912820 30.00.0023

stainless steel 1.4305

Washer, ø 30
63.00.0016

stainless steel 1.4305

Clamp, complete
Rod, M8 ø 12, 7000AA ....* B46.02.005
Stainless steel clamp, 30.00.0023 PA6GF 30%,
Plastic clamp, mk 2522 glass fibre reinforced

Washer, 63.00.0016

Rod, ø 10, 7000AB ....*

Clamp, complete
B46.02.004

stainless steel 1.4305

* Length in mm (4 digits)
298 Conveyor Technology Accessories
 Individual Components
Round Rods
Material: Stainless steel

Rod, ø 12
7000AD. .…*

2-chamfer

stock length 50, 75, 100,

150, 200 and 250 mm

Rod, ø 12
7000AA....*

M8 female thread, one end

stock length 50, 75, 100,

150 and 200 mm

Guide rod, ø 12
9
7000DB. .…*

male thread, M8, one end Guide rod, ø 12

stock length 100, 150 and 7000AF. .…*
200 mm
M8 female thread, both ends

stock length 50, 75, 100

and 150 mm

Guide rod, ø 12
7000CC. .…*

male thread, M8, one end

stock length 50, 75 and

100 mm

Guide rod, ø 12
7000CA. .…*

male thread, M8, one end

stock length 50, 75 and

100 mm

* Length in mm (4 digits)
Conveyor Technology Accessories 299
 Nuts

Nuts for connecting accessories such as initiators,

stoppers, holders, and so on, can be ordered.

Material: Galvanised steel

Nuts for Profile Slot, 10 mm

(all systems except for GUF-P MINI)

Nut 1
M6 34.02.0008

M8 34.01.0001

Nuts for Profile Slot, 7 mm

(GUF-P MINI) Nut 2/25
M6 34.02.0010

Nut 1 without chamfer M8 34.01.0002

M6 34.02.0001

9
Nut 2/35
Nut 2/25
M8 34.01.0011
M6 34.02.0002

Nut 2/50
M6 34.02.0003

Nut 3/50
Nuts for Profile Slot, 10 mm
M8 34.01.0006
(all systems except for GUF-P MINI)

Nut 1 with spring

sheet
M6 34.02.0051

M8 34.01.0051

Nut 1 ESD
Nut 4/50
with spring sheet
M8 34.01.0007
M6 34.02.0050

M8 34.01.0050

300 Conveyor Technology Accessories

 Retrofit Nuts
Retrofit nuts can be slotted into the profile slot
­after the assembly has been completed. In additi-
on, they can be used for profiles with closed slots
that are only open where the connection is ­located.
The swivel-in nuts with spring sheet also provide
an ESD function and an attachment in the slot.

Material: Galvanised steel

Nuts for Profile Slot, 10 mm Nuts for Profile Slot, 10 mm

(all systems except for GUF-P MINI) (all systems except for GUF-P MINI)

Swivel-in nut 1
ESD with spring sheet
T-nut
M4 34.16.0431
M4 34.07.0004

M5 34.07.0003
M5 34.16.0531 9
M6 34.16.0631
M6 34.07.0002
M8 34.16.0831
M8 34.06.0002

Swivel-in nut 1
ESD with spring sheet
M5 34.16.0537
Slot nut M6 34.16.0637
M6 34.04.0003
M8 34.16.0837
M8 34.03.0002
stainless steel
stainless steel

Swivel-in nut 2/40

ESD with spring sheet
Earth Terminal
M8 34.16.0834

Earth Terminal
B02.99.151

Swivel-in nut 3/25

ESD with spring sheet
M8 34.16.0835

Conveyor Technology Accessories 301

 Electrical Components

Reglomats
The integration of conveyor systems into existing
processes is becoming more and more complex.
At the customer’s request, mk can supply complete
solutions from the control concept to hand-over at
the customer’s premises. We can also implement
wiring to terminal boxes, I/O modules or bus sys­
tems based on customer specifications. Even for
small controllers, mk can draw from an extensive
portfolio of standard components.

The mk reglomat lets you control the conveyor

speed within a range of 1:7 (10–70 Hz), assuming
an alternating current and the nominal speed at
50 Hz. With direct current, the range is 1:6 (0.25–
1.5 A or 0.5–3 A).

Reglomats for direct current motor Reglomats for three-phase motors

9 Power supply: Alternating current 230 V 50 Hz Power supply: Alternating current 230 V 50 Hz
Adjustment range: 1:6 (0.25-1.5 A or 0.5-3 A) Adjustment range: 1:7 (10-70 Hz)
A nalogue input, DC 0 to +10 V A nalogue input, DC 0 to +10 V
Digital input for enable  hree digital inputs (for instance, for enabling,
T
Digital output 24 V DC/50 mA reversing the direction of rotation, photoelectric
sensors, and so on)
 ll digital and analogue signals can be also be
A
controlled externally Digital output 24 V DC/50 mA
W x H x D = 200 x 300 x 160 mm W x H x D = 200 x 300 x 160 mm

Item no. Designation Note Item no. Designation Note

B16.08.000 Reglomat 180DC-3A Up to 0.25 KW B16.08.100 Reglomat 230AC-250 Up to 0.18 KW
B16.08.001 Reglomat 180DC-3ARV 180/200V DC B16.08.101 Reglomat 230AC-250RV motor power

Version RV = with reverse operation B16.08.102 Reglomat 230AC-370 Up to 0.25 KW

B16.08.103 Reglomat 230AC-370RV motor power
Reglomats for 24 V DC motors can be supplied on B16.08.104 Reglomat 230AC-550 Up to 0.37 KW
request. motor power
B16.08.105 Reglomat 230AC-550RV
B16.08.106 Reglomat 230AC-750 Up to 0.55 KW
B16.08.107 Reglomat 230AC-750RV motor power

Version RV = with reverse operation

302 Conveyor Technology Accessories

 Initiators
Initiators are used to control, position and monitor
processes in automation technology. The initiators
used in mk conveyor technology consist of four
components: the inductive sensor, the clamp
mount, the sensor cable and the initiator holder.

Initiator holder A
Item no.
16.00.0000 ø 13
16.00.0001 ø 19
Inductive sensor M12x1 16.05.0011 R1/4"
L L1 sn tumbled Al
Item no. [mm] [mm] [mm]
K309000124 45 30 4
K308000009 45 30 2
K308000010 70 40 4
Initiator holder B
9
Item no.
16.00.0006 ø 13
Clamp mount for 16.00.0007 ø 19
M12x1 sensors
tumbled Al
Item no. L [mm]
K309000052 34
K309000053 44.5

Initiator holder C
Sensor cable with
bushing*, M12x1, straight Item no.
16.00.0011 ø9
Item no. L [m]
16.00.0012 ø 13
K307000002 5
16.00.0013 ø 19
galv. steel

Initiator holder E
Sensor cable with bu-
shing*, M12x1, angled Item no.

Item no. L [m] 16.00.0026 ø9

K307000018 5 16.00.0027 ø 13

K307000017 10 16.00.0028 ø 19
galv. steel

* Other end is open cable

Conveyor Technology Accessories 303
 Other Accessories

End Stops
Product on the conveyor often needs to be stopped
for production reasons, especially on belt conveyors
and roller conveyors. mk offers its end stop for this
very purpose. It is easy to mount on the conveyor
frame in the system slots on the conveyor frame
profile. The end stop is equipped with a plastic strip
to avoid damaging the product.

End stop GUF-P 2000 End stop RBS-P 2065/66

B66.00.004 B66.00.003

9 incl. fastening accessories incl. fastening accessories

Belt conveyor GUF-P 2000 Roller conveyor RBS-P 2065

304 Conveyor Technology Accessories

Drip Pan
The stainless steel drip pan is primarily intended
for belt and modular belt conveyors, and its length,
width and depth can be adapted to your particular
conveyor system. It is equipped with a drain nozzle
with an R3/4 thread that can be connected to the
drain lines. Typical applications include conveying
products that are only lightly coated in oil.

Drip pans are always designed and built to order.

Example of the simplest solution

Conveyor Technology Accessories 305

 Application Examples

Safety circuit for emergency access and operating access

Valve terminal with input and output module

306 Conveyor Technology Accessories

Complete control system with Siemens S7 and bus system

Control cabinet attached on the frame and

protective device combination

Conveyor Technology Accessories 307

 Application Examples

Control cabinet with operator panel on Door dial with emergency stop
which minor program changes can be made directly button and mobile operator panel

Enable button with emergency stop button Emergency stop button

308 Conveyor Technology Accessories

Main switch with integrated Mobile touchscreen with connection box
motor overload switch and offset main switch

Compact control device for manual control Standardised operating device

of transport conveyors and their speed

Conveyor Technology Accessories 309

 Application Examples

Lift and transfer with component Flexible compressed air connection

monitoring and end position sensor

Initiator holder made from aluminium angle bracket Square sensor and stopper with monitor

310 Conveyor Technology Accessories

Sensors for deceleration Initiator holder made Photoelectric sensor with
and stopping from VA steel sheet adjustable holder

Adjustable reflector holder Adjustable holder for photoelectric sensors

Conveyor Technology Accessories 311

 Application Examples

Belt conveyor GUF-P 2000 AC Modular belt conveyor MBF-P 2040 with
with end stop at the end of the conveyor end stop at the end of the conveyor

Multi-line, adjustable side rail Wiper brush, rotating,

in gantry arrangement mounted at the end of the conveyor

312 Conveyor Technology Accessories

 Belt conveyor with dust bag Belt conveyor with dust bag

Drip pan with drain port at the Modular belt conveyor with drip pan
beginning of the conveyor

Conveyor Technology Accessories 313

 Chapter 10 Information on Linear Technology

» Reliable and precise

linear motion. «

mk linear technology is the name for our port-

folio of gliding assemblies, track roller assem-
blies and recirculating ball bearing guides
that provide highly precise and reliable linear
motion, and that are designed to meet your
specific requirements.

Whether you need manual adjusting units or

driven linear modules with a timing belt for
handling applications, we’re happy to advise
10 you on how the optimal linear guides can
achieve both exact directional movement and
low-friction transport.

mk’s linear technology components are fully

compatible with mk profile technology. Installing
linear guides allows you to quickly and easily
implement linear movements into your machine
frames. This method reduces the materials
required for the solution, since a separate
support structure for the linear motion is not
required.

314 Information on Linear Technology

 Gliding Assemblies

Benefits of mk
Linear Technology

 he wide range of guides are designed to meet

T
the customer’s requirements and provide opti-
mum function
 ompatible with mk profile series to save mate-
C
rials, costs and space: guides can be mounted
directly on the existing support structure Track Roller Assemblies
 ncomplicated and rapid setup of linear guides
U
based on the add-on principle
 k clamping profile ensures precise travel for
m
maximum parallelism of the guide rods
 ighly reliable operation thanks to high-quality
H
materials and tested third-party parts 10
 k engineers provide expert advice and assis­
m
tance in designing your system

Example of the Recirculating Ball Bearing Guides

add-on principle

Information on Linear Technology 315

 Selecting a Linear Guide

Properties and Benefits of the Different Types of Guide

The following criteria influence the selection of the type of guide to be used for your task
and environmental conditions.

Gliding Assemblies Track Roller Assemblies Recirculating Ball Bearing Guides

 or applications that require

F Compensates for relatively  igh load capacity and high
H
manual adjustment large alignment errors stiffness
High static load capacity Well suited for harsh environ- Compact design
mental conditions such as dust,
Low-maintenance  ust one track for different
J
chips, etc.
types of roller carriage
10  ood dry-running
G
High acceleration up to
characteristics  ightly pre-tensioned (stan-
L
a = 50 m/s²
dard), available with play or
Good damping
High travel speeds up to high pre-tension
Compact design v = 10 m/s
 edium to high acceleration
M
Low-noise running Low rolling resistance up to a = 30m/s²
 k clamping profile ensures
m  edium to high speed up
M
precise travel for maximum to v = 5 m/s
parallelism of the guide rods
 our-row multi-axial recirculat­
F
 imple and economical guide
S ing ball bearing guide bears
design also makes it an attrac­ loads in all directions (forces
tive solution for longer lengths and torques)
Multi-axial, i.e. can be loaded  igh precision with appropriate
H
in all directions (forces and contact surfaces
torques)
 ccentrics allow you to adjust
E
the pre-tension

316 Information on Linear Technology

Selection Matrix for Linear Guides

Recirculating
Gliding Assemblies Track Roller Assemblies Ball Bearing Guides
Running performance
High • •
Low •
Precision
Very high •
High •
Medium •
Low
Speed
Very high • 10
High •
Medium
Low •
Load capacity
Very high •
High •
Medium •
Low
Stiffness
Very high
High •
Medium • •
Low
Maintenance
With restrictions •
Regularly • •
Frequently

Information on Linear Technology 317

 Chapter 11 Linear Units and Modules

Gliding Assemblies 320 Track Roller Assemblies 332 Recirculating

Ball Bearing Guides 384
Adjusting Units VST 2015 324 Features of mk
Adjusting Units VST 2011 328 Track Roller Assemblies 334 Recirculating Ball Bearing 25 388
Mounting Profile 336 Recirculating Ball Bearing 30 390
Individual Components 346
Linear Units 352
Linear Modules LZR 374

11

318 Linear Units and Modules

Application Examples 392

11

Linear Units and Modules 319

 Gliding Assemblies

» Aforsimple solution
manual
positioning tasks. «

Our adjusting units (VST) are gliding assemblies

in which the different guide components, the
profile and the carriages operate on gliding
elements rather than being separated by roller
bearings. The large contact surfaces and special
coating make the gliding assemblies virtually
maintenance free. The adjusting units can be
supplied in different shapes and combinations
as required.

The two basic sizes of adjusting unit use mk

2015 (50x50) and mk 2011 (100x100) aluminium
profiles as the profiles. A high-quality coating
is mechanically applied to the contact surfaces
to ensure good gliding properties and a wear-
11 resistant surface. The standard version of the
adjusting units is equipped with ball-bearing-
mounted trapezoidal threaded spindles with
POM nuts, which are protected from dirt by a
stainless steel cover. The nuts, the bearing and
the gliding assembly are low maintenance.
Custom modifications are available on request,
e.g. rust-proof spindles, bronze trapezoidal nuts,
ball screws or motorised drives.

320 Linear Units and Modules

The position of the slide carriages can be adjusted
with different operating options. When using the
adjusting unit with a handwheel, you turn the wheel
manually and cannot view the adjustment. When
using the adjusting unit with a handwheel and scal­
ing, the adjustment can be viewed on the scaling.
In the variant of the adjusting unit with a handwheel
and mechanical digital display, the adjustment can
be viewed on the digital display.

If requested, the adjusting units can also be

operated with a motor. The maximum speed is
v = 1 m/min.

Features of mk
Gliding Assemblies
11
For applications that require manual adjustment
High static load capacity
Low-maintenance
Good dry-running characteristics
Good damping
Compact design
Low-noise running

Linear Units and Modules 321

 Gliding Assemblies

Designs Combinations Clamping Levers and Wipers

Adjusting unit with one slide A connecting kit lets you The felt wiper prevents solid
carriage combine two adjusting units ­objects from entering between
into one two-axis system. the slide carriages and guide.
It can easily be bolted onto the
standard slide carriages as an
accessory.

In the standard system, the slide

carriage is clamped using a
clamping plate that is fastened
by tightening a screw. This can
also be done using an optional
clamping lever.

Adjusting unit with two slide Felt wiper system 2015

carriages (even adjustment) B03.00.011

Independently adjustable lower

carriages available as an option Connecting kit Felt wiper system 2011
for cross-VST 2015 B03.00.012
B46.07.020
Clamping lever
Connecting kit K110030061
for cross-VST 2011
B46.07.021
11

Adjusting unit with two slide

carriages (even adjustment)

322 Linear Units and Modules

Sample order
Adjusting unit VST 2011-H

Item no. B85.00.020

Length L = ..... mm

Stroke H = ..... mm

Operating option Handwheel Scaling Digital*

Base plate Version A Version B

Felt wiper Yes No

Clamping lever Yes No

For the adjusting unit with two slide carriages with even adjustment,
please specify whether it uses one or two trapezoidal nuts.

With two trapezoidal nuts, Lx = ..... mm (+_ 2 mm)

*For the digital display, please specify “Front” or “Top” for the reading direction and display of numbers.

11

Linear Units and Modules 323

 Gliding Assemblies

Adjusting Units VST 2015

Mounting profile: mk 2015 (50 x 50 mm)
Trapezoid-thread spindle: Tr 16 x 4
Axial spindle load: 500 N
Standard lengths L: 250 mm, 500 mm,
750 mm and 1000 mm

The stroke per revolution is 4 mm,

the minimum stroke length is 10 mm,
and the maximum length L = 1400 mm.

Handwheel Scaling
System 2015 without scale

Type ø 80

Type ø 80:
L3 = 90 mm

System 2015 with scale

11
Base Plates
The scaling has a
spacing of 0.1 mm.

Version B Type ø 80:

L3 = 117 mm

System 2015 with Mechanical Digital Display

Top

Front

When ordering, please specify

“Front” or “Top” for the read­
ing direction and display of
numbers.
Spacing: 0.05 mm
Version A Type ø 80: L3 = 129 mm

324 Linear Units and Modules

VST 2015 with one Slide Carriage
Man

M5x10

Ltot=L+L3+15
L2=Stroke+110
M6x10
L=Stroke+150

11

Designs
Design Without scale Scale Digital display
Designation VST 2015-H VST 2015-S VST 2015-D
Type ø 80 ø 80 ø 80
Item no. B85.00.015 B85.00.016 B85.00.017
Maximum load specifications for VST 2015
Fy Fz Mx My Mz MDrive n v
[N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [min-1] [m/min]

750 750 25 25 25 2.5 250 1

Check max. load specifications for slide carriages, and suitability for use if necessary

Linear Units and Modules 325

 Gliding Assemblies

VST 2015 with two Synchronised or Independent Slide Carriages

Options:
VST with two trapezoidal nuts: the two slide carriages are synchronised (see the arrow directions)
VST with one trapezoidal nut: the lower slide carriages can be separately adjusted manually

Man

Ltot=L+L3+15
L2=Stroke+L1+10
L=Stroke+L1+50

M5x10

M6x10

11

Designs
Design Without scale Scale Digital display
Designation VST 2015-H-2 VST 2015-S-2 VST 2015-D-2
Type ø 80 ø 80 ø 80
Item no. B85.00.115 B85.00.116 B85.00.117
Maximum load specifications for VST 2015
F y* F z* M x* My* M z* MDrive n v
[N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [min-1] [m/min]

750 750 25 25 25 2.5 250 1

Check max. load specifications for slide carriages, and suitability for use if necessary. *Max. load specifications per slide carriage.

326 Linear Units and Modules

VST 2015 with Two Synchronised Slide Carriages

Man

Ltot=L+L3+15
Stroke

L2=2xStroke+220
L=2xStroke+260

M5x10

11
M6x10

Designs
Design Without scale Scale Digital display
Designation VST 2015-H-G VST 2015-S-G VST 2015-D-G
Type ø 80 ø 80 ø 80
Item no. B85.00.215 B85.00.216 B85.00.217
Maximum load specifications for VST 2015
F y* F z* M x* M y* M z* MDrive n v
[N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [min-1] [m/min]

750 750 25 25 25 2.5 250 1

Check max. load specifications for slide carriages, and suitability for use if necessary. *Max. load specifications per slide carriage.

Linear Units and Modules 327

 Gliding Assemblies

Adjusting Units VST 2011

Mounting profile: mk 2011 (100 x 100 mm)
Trapezoid-thread spindle: Tr 20 x 4
Axial spindle load: 1000 N
Standard lengths L: 250 mm, 500 mm,
750 mm and 1000 mm

The stroke per revolution is 4 mm,

the minimum stroke length is 10 mm,
and the maximum length L = 1400 mm.

Handwheel Scaling

System 2011 without scale

Type ø 100

Type ø 100: L3 = 97 mm
Type ø 125: L3 = 110 mm
Type ø 125

System 2011 with scale

11

The scaling has a

spacing of 0.1 mm
Base Plates
Type ø 100: L3 = 123 mm
Type ø 125: L3 = 136 mm
Version B

System 2011 with Mechanical Digital Display

Top

Front

When ordering, please specify

“Front” or “Top” for the reading
direction and display of num-
bers.
Spacing: 0.05 mm
Version A Type ø 100: L3 = 136 mm
Type ø 125: L3 = 149 mm

328 Linear Units and Modules

VST 2011 with one Slide Carriage
Man

Ltot=L+L3+15
L2=Stroke+160
M5x12
L=Stroke+200

M8

11

Designs
Design Without scale Scale Digital display
Designation VST 2011-H VST 2011-H VST 2011-S VST 2011-S VST 2011-D VST 2011-D
Type ø 100 ø 125 ø 100 ø 125 ø 100 ø 125
Item no. B85.00.020 B85.00.025 B85.00.021 B85.00.026 B85.00.022 B85.00.027
Maximum load specifications for VST 2011
Fy Fz Mx My Mz MDrive n v
[N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [min-1] [m/min]

2000 2000 75 100 100 6 250 1

Check max. load specifications for slide carriages, and suitability for use if necessary.

Linear Units and Modules 329

 Gliding Assemblies

VST 2011 with Two Synchronised or Independent Slide Carriages

Options:
VST with two trapezoidal nuts: the two slide carriages are synchronised (see the arrow directions)
VST with one trapezoidal nut: the lower slide carriages can be separately adjusted manually

Man

Ltot=L+L3+15
L2=Stroke+L1+10
L=Stroke+L1+50

M5x12

M8

11

Designs
Design Without scale Scale Digital display
Designation VST 2011-H-2 VST 2011-H-2 VST 2011-S-2 VST 2011-S-2 VST 2011-D-2 VST 2011-D-2
Type ø 100 ø 125 ø 100 ø 125 ø 100 ø 125
Item no. B85.00.120 B85.00.125 B85.00.121 B85.00.126 B85.00.122 B85.00.127
Maximum load specifications for VST 2011
F y* F z* M x* My* M z* MDrive n v
[N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [min-1] [m/min]

2000 2000 75 100 100 6 250 1

Check max. load specifications for slide carriages, and suitability for use if necessary. *Max. load specifications per slide carriage.

330 Linear Units and Modules

VST 2011 with Two Synchronised Slide Carriages

Man

Stroke

Ltot=L+L3+15
L2=2xStroke+220
L=2xStroke+260

M5x12

M8 11

Designs
Design Without scale Scale Digital display
Designation VST 2011-H-G VST 2011-H-G VST 2011-S-G VST 2011-S-G VST 2011-D-G VST 2011-D-G
Type ø 100 ø 125 ø 100 ø 125 ø 100 ø 125
Item no. B85.00.220 B85.00.225 B85.00.221 B85.00.226 B85.00.222 B85.00.227
Maximum load specifications for VST 2011
F y* F z* M x* M y* M z* MDrive n v
[N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [min-1] [m/min]

2000 2000 75 100 100 6 250 1

Check max. load specifications for slide carriages, and suitability for use if necessary. *Max. load specifications per slide carriage.

Linear Units and Modules 331

 Track Roller Assemblies

» Linear modules
based on track roller
assemblies. «

Because of their rigid structure, track roller

assemblies offer high accelerations and speeds
over a long service life and allow for fast posi­
tioning with high repeatability.

They are excellently suited for both single-axis

applications and use as multi-axis systems.
Linear systems constructed from these modules
can meet even the most demanding technical
and financial requirements.

Track roller assemblies consist of a linear guide

with a matching roller carriage. The guide is built
from a standard mk profile that acts as the
mounting profile and guide rods that are mounted
to the mounting profile with a clamping profile.
The roller carriage consists of a support plate
and guide rollers, which can be custom-config­
11 ured to meet your specific requirements. The
guide rollers have eccentric bearings to prevent
play in the guide. The series and the dimensions
chosen for the mounting profile are key factors
that determine the linear module design.

Linear Module with Timing Belt (LZR)

Linear modules based on track roller assemblies
are usually equipped with a high-powered drive
connected via a timing belt. The components of
the timing belt drive responsible for transferring
the power, such as the deflection bearings and
the connectors, are mounted on the mounting
profile at the head end. The motor can be con­
nected directly via the shaft end or indirectly on
request. LZRs are the preferred solutions for im­
plementing handling systems with an X-Y-Z axis.

332 Linear Units and Modules

Benefits of mk
Track Roller Assemblies

Compensates for relatively large alignment errors

 ell suited for harsh environmental conditions
W
such as dust, chips, etc.
High acceleration up to a = 50 m/s²
High travel speeds up to v = 10 m/s
Low rolling resistance
 k clamping profile ensures precise travel for
m
maximum parallelism of the guide rods 11
 imple and economical guide design also makes
S
it an attractive solution for longer lengths
 ulti-axial, i.e. can be loaded in all directions
M
(forces and torques)
Eccentrics allow you to adjust the pre-tension

Linear Units and Modules 333

 Features of mk Track Roller Assemblies

Series 25 Profile Guides

Mounting Profiles
The linear units and modules shown in the cata­
logue are based on mk’s own profile system. Note ø 6 mm ø 6 mm
the series and dimensions of the mounting profiles.
Series 40 Profile Guides
Mounting profiles can also be used in combination
with foamed combined profiles to construct gantries
with span widths of up to 10 metres.
ø 6 mm ø 10 mm ø 10 mm ø 16 mm
The suitability for use (deformation) and strength
calculation are decisive factors for the mounting
profile. A deformation of 1 mm/m is permitted for
the function of the linear guide. The deformation
and strength are calculated based on the basic rules ø 6 mm ø 10 mm
of technical mechanics.
Series 50 Profile Guides

ø 10 mm ø 16 mm

Examples of mk Mounting Profiles Series 60 Profile Guides

Series 25 Series 40 Series 50 Series 60

ø 10 mm ø 16 mm
11

Adapter Profiles
Examples of Foamed Combined Profiles Adapter profiles enable a wide variety of possible
combinations. They are used to create the necessary
distance for the roller carriage in cases where the
dimensions of the mounting profile exceed the
clamping profile. Some profiles can also be adapted
between different profile series.

Without adapter profile With adapter profile

334 Linear Units and Modules

Stock lengths Roller Carriage
The maximum length of linear units is 6000 mm. The mk roller carriage comes with four rollers as
It can be exceeded by mounting multiple mounting standard, but is also available as an option with
profiles with clamping profiles and guide rods set on three or two rollers on request.
joins that are mounted staggered with each other.

Example of Example of
external track rollers internal track rollers

Guides Designs
The load capacity of the guide is based primarily on The mk roller carriage is available with the standard
the diameter of the guide rod and on the correspond­­ design (see above) and two additional designs. 11
ing guide roller. mk offers four guide rod diameters.
The guide rods (ground h6) are made from the mate­
rial Cf 53 as standard, but are also available as op­
Cross-carriage Double-roller carriage
tions made from X46 Cr13 with corrosion resistance
or galvanised Cf 53 with corrosion protection.

Guide rod 6
0.22 kg/m

Guide rod 10
0.62 kg/m

Guide rod 16
1.58 kg/m

Linear Units and Modules 335

 Features of mk Track Roller Assemblies

Design of the Track Rollers Calculations

The indicated static load carrying capacities can When confirming the suitability of particular track
be used as a guideline for the preliminary selection rollers, a distinction must be made between static
of track rollers. These values are the maximum and the dynamic loading. Static loads are loads that
allowable unit loads and include a static safety factor are transferred at the contact point between the rod
s0 = 4 in relation to the plastic deformation of the and the track roller while the roller is not rotating.
roller bearings within the steel track roller. For stain­ That is to say that dynamic loads, or loads along
less steel components, these values must be reduced other axes, must also be considered.
by 30%.
It is helpful to first confirm the static and then the
The load values shown for the axial load (Fy) and dynamic load calculations. The allowable static
radial load (Fz) are for moment-free loads. The al­ axial and radial track roller loads and the static and
lowable moments are the result of opposing offset dynamic safety factors of the most highly loaded
loads. rollers must be confirmed. The maximum track roller
loads are technically considered mechanical contact
Combined loads must be verified separately. A com­ loads (supported loads).
bined load is a single point load which, with a 50
mm offset for example, also introduces a moment. The static safety factor and dynamic safety factor
Careful consideration must be given to combined are derived from the relationship between the al­
loads which cause torsion. lowable load capacity Cw and the available equiva­
lent load P.
When arranging track rollers, it is important that the
track rollers only transfer compressive loads in the
radial direction. The centric track rollers are espe­
Recommended Guidelines
cially suitable for handling radial loads, especially Up to v = 3m/s and a = 3 m/s2, full load capacity of
in the Fz direction. The centric track rollers are pre­ the track rollers with sO ≥ 4 and 2 < sD ≤ 5.
vented from twisting by using a steel bushing.
11 For high dynamic loads with a > 10 m/s2 and speeds
Application Notes of up to v = 10m/s, the load values must be reduced.

Care must be taken to ensure that the track rollers

are installed in an unloaded condition. In most
cases, readjustment of the eccentric track rollers
under load

causes premature wear. For “normal” applications

(up to a = 3 m/s2), the track rollers should be set so
that they rotate as they travel along the track but you
can still prevent this rotation by placing your thumb
and index finger on the circumference of the roller.

For applications requiring a speed of over a =

3 m/s2, the track rollers require further pre-tension­
ing, and you can then no longer manually prevent
the rollers from rotating. As an additional safety
measure, we recommend securing the eccentric
bushings with adhesive to prevent them from slip­
ping. To prevent corrosion and increased abrasion,
sufficient lubrication must also be used.

336 Linear Units and Modules

Technical Specifications for Track Roller Assemblies

L2

a2
11
Static safety factor: Equivalent loads Track roller loads
Cow – Static: – Radial:
so = ≥ 4 = so recomm.
Po Po = xo · Fro + yo · Fao [N] Fz(o) My(o)
Fr(o) = ± ± [N]
2 L2
Dynamic safety factor: – Dynamic:
– Axial:
C P = x · Fr + y · Fa [N] Fy(o) Mx(o) Mz(o)
sD = w ≥ 5 = sD recomm.
P Fa(o) = ± ± ± [N]
4 2 · a2 2 · L2
Factors from the table
Nominal service life: Most highly loaded roll (that is,
– Static: roller stationary
with the largest value respectively)
Lh = ( Cw
P
)3 [105 m] – Dynamic: roller rotating

Load specifications
Designation Rod Fro-max Fao-max Fr(0) ≥ Fa(0) Fr(0) < Fa(0) Cow Cw [N]
based on
Item no. Guide with ø [N] [N] xo yo x y xo yo x y [N] 105 m

K101100003 LR 6 6 175 60 1.2 3.6 1.0 3.1 0.9 3.6 0.5 3.9 890 1270

K101100001 LR 10 10 1000 300 1.2 4.0 1.0 3.4 0.9 4.0 0.5 4.3 5100 8500

K101100002 LR 16 16 2000 500 1.2 4.8 1.0 3.9 1.0 5.0 0.5 4.8 9500 16800

K101100006 LR 20 20 3250 825 1.2 4.9 1.0 4.0 1.1 5.0 0.5 4.9 16600 29500

Linear Units and Modules 337

 Series 25 Mounting Profiles

Selection Based on Load and Length

Example F F = 100 N
L = 1000 mm
=> suitable profile mk 2025.02-flat

f
with f ≤ 1
L L 1000

f 1
With point load at centre and profile weight for the case: =
L 1000

1000
Load F [N]

mk
500 202
5.0
4
mk
300 20
25
.03

200
m
k
m

20
k

25
20

.0
25
mk

5
.0
mk

100
2
20
20

25
25

.02
.01

-fla
t

50
11
30

20
Length L [mm]

10
0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4500

5000

Calculating the Deflection

Use our online tool at www.mk-group.com/en/deflection

Mbmax Rp0,2 Rp0.2 = 200 N/mm2 (AlMgSi 0.5 F25)

sb = Wx,y S= sb Rp0.2 = 215 N/mm2 (AlMgSi 0.7 F27)

F F·L q q · L2
Mbmax = Mbmax =
4 8
f
f

F · L3 5 q · L4
L f= L f= ·
48 · E · Ix,y 384 E · Ix,y

338 Linear Units and Modules

Mounting Profiles with Properties
Area Mass Moments of inertia Section moduli
A m Ix ly Wx Wy
[mm²] [kg/m] [cm4] [cm4] [cm³] [cm³]

Series 25 Profiles
mk 2025.01 279 0.75 1.73 1.73 1.38 1.38
25.01. ....

mk 2025.02 501 1.35 12.20 3.30 4.87 2.64

25.02. ....

mk 2025.03 945 2.55 87.00 6.44 17.40 5.15

25.03. ....

mk 2025.04 1390 3.75 280.00 9.58 37.30 7.66

25.04. ....

mk 2025.05 816 2.21 22.30 22.30 8.90 8.90

25.05. ....

11

Linear Units and Modules 339

 Series 40 Mounting Profiles

Selection Based on Load and Length

Example F F = 300 N
L = 1500 mm
=> suitable profile mk 2040.02-flat

f
with f ≤ 1
L L 1000

f 1
With point load at centre and profile weight for the case: =
L 1000

10000
Load F [N]

5000
Ser
3000 ie
pro s 40 f
file o
s (1 amed
20
2000 x 28 comb
0) ined

mk
1000 mk 2
20 040.
m 40 1
mk k 2 .07 0
m 0 40
500 k 2 204 .05
m 04 0.0 m
k 0. 7 k2
20 03 -fla 04
300 40
.0 an t 0.
2 d 08
m
m

k2
200
k

04 m
m

20

0. k
k

40

73 20
20

40
.0
40

2-

.0
100
.0

6
fla

11
1

50
30 Length L [mm]
20

10
0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4500

5000

5500

6000

6500

7000

7500

8000

Calculating the Deflection

Use our online tool at www.mk-group.com/en/deflection

Mbmax Rp0,2 Rp0.2 = 200 N/mm2 (AlMgSi 0.5 F25)

sb = Wx,y S= sb Rp0.2 = 215 N/mm2 (AlMgSi 0.7 F27)

F F·L q q · L2
Mbmax = Mbmax =
4 8
f
f

F · L3 5 q · L4
L f= L f= ·
48 · E · Ix,y 384 E · Ix,y

340 Linear Units and Modules

Mounting Profiles with Properties
Area Mass Moments of inertia Section moduli
A m Ix ly Wx Wy
[mm²] [kg/m] [cm4] [cm4] [cm³] [cm³]

Series 40 Profiles
mk 2040.01 742 2.00 12.10 12.10 6.06 6.06
54.01. ....

mk 2040.02 1340 3.62 83.30 22.60 20.80 11.30

54.02. ....

mk 2040.05 1740 4.69 257.00 31.60 43.70 15.80

54.05. ....

mk 2040.06 2320 6.26 576.00 41.40 72.00 20.70

54.06. ....

mk 2040.03 2060 5.57 150.00 150.00 37.40 37.40

54.03. ....

mk 2040.73 2110 5.72 150.00 150.00 37.10 37.40

54.73. .... 11

mk 2040.07 2580 6.96 441.00 208.00 73.40 52.10

54.07. ....

mk 2040.08 3500 9.46 949.00 272.00 119.00 68.00

54.08. ....

mk 2040.10 3060 8.26 585.00 585.00 97.50 97.50

54.10. ....

Linear Units and Modules 341

 Series 50 Mounting Profiles

Selection Based on Load and Length

Example F F = 400 N
L = 2000 mm
=> suitable profile mk 2004-flat

f
with f ≤ 1
L L 1000

f 1
With point load at centre and profile weight for the case: =
L 1000

10000
Load F [N]

Seri
5000 prof es 50 f
iles o
(100 amed c
3000 x 30 ombi
0) ned

2000

mk
1000 200
8
mk mk
20 20
04 09
500 mk
m 20
k 06
20
300 04
m

-fl
k

at
20

m
200
00

k
20
m

23
k
20
11

100
11
50
mk 2

30
005

Length L [mm]
20

10
0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4500

5000

5500

6000

6500

7000

7500

8000

Calculating the Deflection

Use our online tool at www.mk-group.com/en/deflection

Mbmax Rp0,2 Rp0.2 = 200 N/mm2 (AlMgSi 0.5 F25)

sb = Wx,y S= sb Rp0.2 = 215 N/mm2 (AlMgSi 0.7 F27)

F F·L q q · L2
Mbmax = Mbmax =
4 8
f
f

F · L3 5 q · L4
L f= L f= ·
48 · E · Ix,y 384 E · Ix,y

342 Linear Units and Modules

Mounting Profiles with Properties
Area Mass Moments of inertia Section moduli
A m Ix ly Wx Wy
[mm²] [kg/m] [cm4] [cm4] [cm³] [cm³]

Series 50 Profiles
mk 2000 1080 2.85 29.90 29.90 12.00 12.00
51.00. ....

mk 2023 1400 3.78 89.3 39.6 23.8 15.8

51.23. ....

mk 2004 1810 4.87 200.00 55.40 40.00 22.10

51.04. ....

mk 2006 2600 7.00 597.00 80.50 79.70 32.10

51.06. ....

mk 2008 3370 9.09 1300.00 107.00 130.00 42.70

51.08. ....

mk 2005 (light duty)

51.05. ....
2650 7.00 335.00 335.00 67.00 67.00 11

mk 2011 3670 9.70 383.00 383.00 76.70 76.70

51.11. ....

mk 2009 2320 6.27 239 239 42 42

51.09. ....

Linear Units and Modules 343

 Series 60 Mounting Profiles

Selection Based on Load and Length

Example F F = 800 N
L = 4500 mm
=> suitable profile mk 2060.05

f
with f ≤ 1
L L 1000

f 1
With point load at centre and profile weight for the case: =
L 1000

10000
Load F [N]

Foa
5000 med C
omb
ined
3000 Pro
files
mk mk
2000 206 mk
20 60.0
mk 0.0 206 7
20 3 0.04
mk 60
20 .05
1000 60
.02
m
m k
k 20
20 60
500 60 .0
.0 2-
1 fla
300 t

200

100
11
50
30 Length L [mm]
20

10
0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4500

5000

5500

6000

6500

7000

7500

8000

Calculating the Deflection

Use our online tool at www.mk-group.com/en/deflection

Mbmax Rp0,2 Rp0.2 = 200 N/mm2 (AlMgSi 0.5 F25)

sb = Wx,y S= sb Rp0.2 = 215 N/mm2 (AlMgSi 0.7 F27)

F F·L q q · L2
Mbmax = Mbmax =
4 8
f
f

F · L3 5 q · L4
L f= L f= ·
48 · E · Ix,y 384 E · Ix,y

344 Linear Units and Modules

Mounting Profiles with Properties
Area Mass Moments of inertia Section moduli
A m Ix ly Wx Wy
[mm²] [kg/m] [cm4] [cm4] [cm³] [cm³]

Series 60 Profiles
mk 2060.01 1600 4.31 60.20 60.20 20.00 20.00
60.01. ....

mk 2060.02 2580 6.95 404.00 103.00 67.30 34.50

60.02. ....

mk 2060.03 3540 9.57 1210.00 147.00 134.00 48.90

60.03. ....

mk 2060.04 4520 12.20 2660.00 190.00 221.00 63.30

60.04. ....

mk 2060.05 3800 10.30 660.00 660.00 110.00 110.00

60.05. .... 11

mk 2060.07 6700 18.10 4090.00 1180.00 340.00 169.00

60.07. ....

Linear Units and Modules 345

 Individual Components

Clamping Profiles for Series 25 Clamping Profiles for Series 40

Profile mk 2038.20 Profile mk 2038.30
0.44 kg/m 0.79 kg/m
Stock length 38.20.6100 Stock length 38.30.6100
Cut 38.20. .... Cut 38.30. ....
Used for ø 6 mm guide rod Used for ø 6 mm guide rod

Profile mk 2038.21 Profile mk 2038.31

0.88 kg/m 1.07 kg/m
Stock length 38.21.6100 Stock length 38.31.6100
Cut 38.21. .... Cut 38.31. ....
Used for ø 6 mm guide rod Used for ø 10 mm guide rod

Profile mk 2038.32
0.44 kg/m
Stock length 38.32.6100
Cut 38.32. ....
11 Used for ø 10 mm guide rod

Profile mk 2038.33
2.96 kg/m
Stock length 38.33.6100
Cut 38.33. ....
Used for ø 16 mm guide rod

Profile mk 2038.07
1.50 kg/m
Stock length 38.07.6100
Cut 38.07. ....
Used for ø 16 mm guide rod

346 Linear Units and Modules

Clamping Profiles for Series 40 Clamping Profiles for Series 50
Profile mk 2038.75 Profile mk 2038.46
3.41 kg/m 3.97 kg/m
Stock length 38.75.6100 Stock length 38.46.6100
Cut 38.75. .... Cut 38.46. ....
Used for ø 6 mm guide rod Used for ø 20 mm guide rod
Internal guide

Profile mk 2038.77 Profile mk 2038.12

4.34 kg/m 1.77 kg/m
Stock length 38.77.6100 Stock length 38.12.6100
Cut 38.77. .... Cut 38.12. ....
Used for ø 10 mm guide rod Used for ø 16 mm guide rod
Internal guide

Clamping Profiles for Series 50 Clamping Profiles for Series 60 11

Profile mk 2038.41
1.36 kg/m
Stock length 38.41.6100
Cut 38.41. ....
Profile mk 2038.36
Used for ø 10 mm guide rod
3.62 kg/m
Stock length 38.36.6100
Cut 38.36. ....
Profile mk 2038.44
Used for ø 16 mm guide rod
3.09 kg/m
Stock length 38.44.6100
Cut 38.44. ....
Used for ø 16 mm guide rod

Linear Units and Modules 347

 Individual Components

Adapter Profiles for Series 25 Adapter Profiles for Series 50

Profile mk 2038.50 Profile mk 2038.60

0.46 kg/m 1.04 kg/m
Stock length 38.50.6100 Stock length 38.60.6100
Cut 38.50. .... Cut 38.60. ....

Profile mk 2038.61
1.90 kg/m
Stock length 38.61.6100
Cut 38.61. ....

Adapter Profiles for

Series 40 and 50
11

Profile mk 2038.55
0.77 kg/m
Stock length 38.55.6100
Cut 38.55. ....

Profile mk 2038.56
1.67 kg/m
Stock length 38.56.6100
Cut 38.56. ....

348 Linear Units and Modules

 11

Linear Units and Modules 349

 Individual Components

Guide Rollers
for ø 6, ø 10, ø 16, ø 20 guide rods

Technical Values
D B A A1 A2 SW d for Consisting of:
Item no. [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] Rod Track roller Bolt Spacer ring Bushing
B60.02.017 centric 17 8 6 7 7 13 ø 6* K101100003 25.51.3201 25.51.3301 25.51.3101

11 B60.02.018 eccentric 17 8 6 7 7 13 ø 6* K101100003 25.51.3201 25.51.3301 25.51.3102

B60.02.015 centric 35 15.9 12 12.5 13 22 ø 10* K101100001 05.06.0003 14.04.0003 06.01.0013
B60.02.016 eccentric 35 15.9 12 12.5 13 22 ø 10* K101100001 05.06.0003 14.04.0003 06.01.0014
B60.02.013 centric 52 22.6 12 19.5 16.3 27 ø 16* K101100002 05.06.0007 14.04.0004 06.01.0018
B60.02.014 eccentric 52 22.6 12 19.5 16.3 27 ø 16* K101100002 05.06.0007 14.04.0004 06.01.0017
B60.02.011 centric 72 25.8 18 22 18 36 ø 20* K101100006 05.06.0009 14.04.0020 06.01.0021
B60.02.012 eccentric 72 25.8 18 22 18 36 ø 20* K101100006 05.06.0009 14.04.0020 06.01.0022

*For item numbers, see page 351

Guide rollers also available in stainless steel for all diameters.

Load Specifications per Roller

Roller for Roller for Roller for Roller for
Value ø 6 mm rod ø 10 mm rod ø 16 mm rod ø 20 mm rod
so* 4 4 4 4
Fr 175N 1000N 2000N 3250N
Fa 60N 300N 500N 825N
Static load capacity Cow 890N 5100N 9500N 16600N
Dynamic load capacity Cw 1270N 8500N 16800N 29500N
*Static load safety factor against plastic deformation on the roller contact in the track roller.
For stainless steel guide rods, these values must be reduced by 30%.

350 Linear Units and Modules

Guide Rods Wipers
The stock length for Cf 53 and X46 Cr13 with Polyamide
corrosion resistance (magnetisable) is 4000 mm.
For galvanised Cf 53 with corrosion protection, The wipers act as a safety element (for protection
it is 3000 mm. against pinch points while guiding the roller) and also
wipe coarse dirty from the guide rod.

With the wipers for rod diameters 10 and 16, a seal­

Guide rod 6 ing lip clings to the guide rod and wipes away even
0.22 kg/m finer particles.

The wipers for rod diameters 10 and 16 are also

available on request with felt strips and lubrication
nipples for lubrication with oil.

Guide rod 10
0.62 kg/m

Guide rod 16 H
1.58 kg/m

L1 B
11

Guide rod 20
2.47 kg/m

Item no. Technical Values

Cf 53 Cf 53** X46 Cr13 d for L1 B H D
11,213 11,213 14,034 Item no. Rod [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]

ø 6 mm 7003AK....* 7003DC....* 7003EC....* B03.00.014 ø 6*** 25 22.5 11 19

ø 10 mm 7003AA....* 7003DH....* 7003EH....* B03.00.003 ø 10 50 46 20 37

ø 16 mm 7003AM....* 7003DP....* 7003EP....* B03.00.004 ø 16 70 64 30 56

ø 20 mm 7003CM....* 7003DT....* 7003ET....* B03.00.013 ø 20*** 100 80 35 76

....* Shaft length in mm ***Wiper without sealing lip
** Galvanised

Linear Units and Modules 351

 Series 25 Linear Units

Profile Guide PF 6-38.20/50

The profile guide PF 6-38.20 with or without an
adapter profile can be combined with the profiles
from series 25 and the roller carriage shown on the
next page. When combined, they form a linear unit.

11
Profile guide PF 6-38.20 Profile Guide PF 6-38.20/50
B51.04.025 B51.04.029

1.5 kg/m With adapter profile

L1 up to 6000 mm
2 kg/m
L1 up to 6000 mm

Borehole spacing specifications

Scope of application: 75 ≤ L1 ≤ 6000

12.5 ≤ A < 37.5

L1-(2 x A)
N= +1
50
L1 = length of the profile guide
A = distance from the first borehole to the profile edge
N = number of screws

352 Linear Units and Modules

Roller Carriage LW 38.20-04
for Profile Guide PF 6-38.20/50

M5x12
M5x12

11

Technical Values

L1 Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0 mcarriage Plate, individual

Item no. Designation [mm] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [kg]

B90.25.041 LW 38.20-04 75 200 350 2.5 8.5 5 0.35 5009CA0075

B90.25.041 LW 38.20-04 100 200 350 2.5 13 8.0 0.43 5009CA0100

 ax. load specifications for v ≤ 10 m/s and a ≤ 10 m/s2; with s0 = 4

M
Max. acceleration a = 50 m/s2 with reduced load
Load application point max. 15 mm off-centre
For X46 Cr13 rods and rollers, the load capacity must be reduced by 30%

Linear Units and Modules 353

 Series 25 Linear Units

Profile Guide PF 6-38.21

The profile guide PF 6-38.21 can be combined with
the profiles from series 25 and the roller carriage
shown on the next page. When combined, they form
a linear unit.

11

Profile guide PF 6-38.21

B51.04.030

2 kg/m
L1 up to 6000 mm

Borehole spacing specifications

Range: 100 ≤ L1 ≤ 6000

12.5 ≤ A < 50

N= ( L1-(2 x A)
75
+1 ) x2

L1 = length of the profile guide

A = distance from the first borehole to the profile edge
N = number of screws

354 Linear Units and Modules

Roller Carriage LW 38.21-04
For profile guide PF 6-38.21

M5x12
M5x12

11

Technical Values

L1 Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0 mcarriage Plate, individual

Item no. Designation [mm] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [kg]

B90.25.042 LW 38.21-04 100 200 350 5 13 8 0.55 5009CB0100

B90.25.042 LW 38.21-04 150 200 350 5 21 13 0.75 5009CB0150

 ax. load specifications for v ≤ 10 m/s and a ≤ 10 m/s2; with s0 = 4

M
Max. acceleration a = 50 m/s2 with reduced load
Load application point max. 15 mm off-centre
For X46 Cr13 rods and rollers, the load capacity must be reduced by 30%

Linear Units and Modules 355

 Series 40 Linear Units

Profile Guide PF 6-38.30/55

The profile guide PF 6-38.30 with or without an
adapter profile can be combined with the profiles
from series 40 and the roller carriage shown on the
next page. When combined, they form a linear unit.

11
Profile Guide PF 6-38.30 Profile Guide PF 6-38.30/55
B51.04.042 B51.04.043

1.8 kg/m With adapter profile

L1 up to 6000 mm
2.6 kg/m
L1 up to 6000 mm

Borehole spacing specifications

Range: 75 ≤ L1 ≤ 6000
12.5 ≤ A < 37.5
L1-(2 x A)
N= +1
50

L1 = length of the profile guide

A = distance from the first borehole to the profile edge
N = number of screws

356 Linear Units and Modules

Roller Carriage LW 38.30-04
for Profile Guide PF 6-38.30/55

M5x12
M5x12

11

Technical Values

L1 Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0 mcarriage Plate, individual

Item no. Designation [mm] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [kg]

B90.40.041 LW 38.30-04 100 200 350 4 13 8 0.55 5009CC0100

B90.40.041 LW 38.30-04 160 200 350 4 23 14 0.8 5009CC0160

 ax. load specifications for v ≤ 10 m/s and a ≤ 10 m/s2; with s0 = 4

M
Max. acceleration a = 50 m/s2 with reduced load
Load application point max. 15 mm off-centre
For X46 Cr13 rods and rollers, the load capacity must be reduced by 30%

Linear Units and Modules 357

 Series 40 Linear Units

Profile Guide PF 10-38.31/55

The profile guide PF 10-38.31 with or without an
adapter profile can be combined with the profiles
from series 40 and the roller carriage shown on the
next page. When combined, they form a linear unit.

11
Profile Guide PF 10-38.31 Profile Guide PF 10-38.31/55
B51.04.046 B51.04.047

2.8 kg/m With adapter profile

L1 up to 6000 mm
3.6 kg/m
L1 up to 6000 mm

Borehole spacing specifications

Range: 150 ≤ L1 ≤ 6000

25 ≤ A < 75

L1-(2 x A)
N= +1
100
L1 = length of the profile guide
A = distance from the first borehole to the profile edge
N = number of screws

358 Linear Units and Modules

Roller Carriage LW 38.31-04
for Profile Guide PF 10-38.31/55

M8x16
M8x16

11

Technical Values

L1 Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0 mcarriage Plate, individual

Item no. Designation [mm] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [kg]

B90.40.042 LW 38.31-04 140 1000 2000 18 90 45 2 5009CD0140

B90.40.042 LW 38.31-04 240 1000 2000 18 190 95 2.8 5009CD0240

 ax. load specifications for v ≤ 10 m/s and a ≤ 10 m/s2; with s0 = 4

M
Max. acceleration a = 50 m/s2 with reduced load
Load application point max. 25 mm off-centre
For X46 Cr13 rods and rollers, the load capacity must be reduced by 30%

Linear Units and Modules 359

 Series 40 Linear Units

Profile Guide PF 10-38.32/56

The profile guide PF 10-38.32 with or without an
adapter profile can be combined with the profiles
from series 40 and the roller carriage shown on the
next page. When combined, they form a linear unit.

11

Profile Guide PF 10-38.32 Profile Guide PF 10-38.32/56

B51.04.048 B51.04.049

4 kg/m With adapter profile

L1 up to 6000 mm
5.8 kg/m
L1 up to 6000 mm

Borehole spacing specifications

Range: 200 ≤ L1 ≤ 6000

25 ≤ A < 100

N= ( L1-(2 x A)
150
+1 ) x2

L1 = length of the profile guide

A = distance from the first borehole to the profile edge
N = number of screws

360 Linear Units and Modules

Roller Carriage LW 38.32-04
for Profile Guide PF 10-38.32/56

M8x16
M8x16

11

Technical Values

L1 Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0 mcarriage Plate, individual

Item no. Designation [mm] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [kg]

B90.40.043 LW 38.32-04 180 1000 2000 40 130 65 2.8 5009CE0180

B90.40.043 LW 38.32-04 280 1000 2000 40 230 115 3.8 5009CE0280

 ax. load specifications for v ≤ 10 m/s and a ≤ 10 m/s2; with s0 = 4

M
Max. acceleration a = 50 m/s2 with reduced load
Load application point max. 25 mm off-centre
For X46 Cr13 rods and rollers, the load capacity must be reduced by 30%

Linear Units and Modules 361

 Series 40 Linear Units

Profile Guide PF 16-38.33/56

The profile guide PF 16-38.33 with or without an
adapter profile can be combined with the profiles
from series 40 and the roller carriage shown on the
next page. When combined, they form a linear unit.

11

Profile Guide PF 16-38.33 Profile Guide PF 16-38.33/56

B51.04.052 B51.04.053

7 kg/m With adapter profile

L1 up to 6000 mm
8.8 kg/m
L1 up to 6000 mm

Borehole spacing specifications

450 ≤ L1 < 6000

Range: 150 ≤ L1 < 450 450 ≤ L1 < 6000 150 ≤ L1 < 450

25 ≤ A < 75 125 ≤ A < 225

N= ( L1-(2 x A)
100
)
+1 x 2 N= ( L1-(2 x A)
200
)
+3 x 2

L1 = length of the profile guide

A = distance from the first borehole to the profile edge
N = number of screws

362 Linear Units and Modules

Roller Carriage LW 38.33-04
for Profile Guide PF 16-38.33/56

M8x16
M8x16

11

Technical Values

L1 Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0 mcarriage Plate, individual

Item no. Designation [mm] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [kg]

B90.40.044 LW 38.33-04 240 1600 4000 60 340 140 5.5 5009CF0240

B90.40.044 LW 38.33-04 400 1600 4000 60 660 260 8 5009CF0400

 ax. load specifications for v ≤ 10 m/s and a ≤ 10 m/s2; with s0 = 4

M
Max. acceleration a = 50 m/s2 with reduced load
Load application point max. 30 mm off-centre
For X46 Cr13 rods and rollers, the load capacity must be reduced by 30%

Linear Units and Modules 363

 Series 40 Linear Units

Internal Profile Guide

PF 6-38.75
The profile guide PF 6-38.75 can be combined
with the roller carriage shown on the next page.
When combined, they form a linear unit.

11

Profile Guide PF 6-38.75

B51.04.140

3.9 kg/m
L1 up to 6000 mm

364 Linear Units and Modules

Roller Carriage LW 38.75-44
For profile guide PF 6-38.75

M5x12
M5x20

11

Technical Values

L1 Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0 mcarriage Plate, individual

Item no. Designation [mm] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [kg]

B90.40.441 LW 38.75-44 120 200 350 5 15 10 0.5 5009CN0120

 ax. load specifications for v ≤ 10 m/s and a ≤ 10 m/s2; with s0 = 4

M
Max. acceleration a = 50 m/s2 with reduced load
Load application point max. 15 mm off-centre
For X46 Cr13 rods and rollers, the load capacity must be reduced by 30%

Linear Units and Modules 365

 Series 40 Linear Units

Internal Profile Guide

PF 10-38.77
The profile guide PF 10-38.77 can be combined
with the roller carriage shown on the next page.
When combined, they form a linear unit.

11

Profile guide PF 10-38.77

B51.04.142

5.6 kg/m
L1 up to 6000 mm

366 Linear Units and Modules

Roller Carriage LW 38.77-44
For profile guide PF 10-38.77

M8x16
M8x25

11

Technical Values

L1 Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0 mcarriage Plate, individual

Item no. Designation [mm] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [kg]

B90.40.443 LW 38.77-44 160 1000 1500 20 60 40 1.5 5009CO0160

 ax. load specifications for v ≤ 10 m/s and a ≤ 10 m/s2; with s0 = 4

M
Max. acceleration a = 50 m/s2 with reduced load
Load application point max. 25 mm off-centre
For X46 Cr13 rods and rollers, the load capacity must be reduced by 30%

Linear Units and Modules 367

 Series 50 Linear Units

Profile Guide PF 10-38.41/60

The profile guide PF 10-38.41 with or without an
adapter profile can be combined with the profiles
from series 50 and the roller carriage shown on the
next page. When combined, they form a linear unit.

11
Profile guide PF 10-38.41 Profile Guide PF 10-38.41/60
B51.04.020 B51.04.015

3 kg/m With adapter profile

L1 up to 6000 mm
4.2 kg/m
L1 up to 6000 mm

Borehole spacing specifications

Range: 150 ≤ L1 ≤ 6000

25 ≤ A < 75

L1-(2 x A)
N= +1
100
L1 = length of the profile guide
A = distance from the first borehole to the profile edge
N = number of screws

368 Linear Units and Modules

Roller Carriage LW 38.41-04
for Profile Guide PF 10-38.41/60

M8x16
M8x16

11

Technical Values

L1 Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0 mcarriage Plate, individual

Item no. Designation [mm] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [kg]

B90.50.042 LW 38.41-04 150 1000 2000 25 100 50 2.2 5009CG0150

B90.50.042 LW 38.41-04 250 1000 2000 25 200 100 3 5009CG0250

 ax. load specifications for v ≤ 10 m/s and a ≤ 10 m/s2; with s0 = 4

M
Max. acceleration a = 50 m/s2 with reduced load
Load application point max. 25 mm off-centre
For X46 Cr13 rods and rollers, the load capacity must be reduced by 30%

Linear Units and Modules 369

 Series 50 Linear Units

Profile Guide PF 16-38.44/61

The profile guide PF 16-38.44 with or without an
adapter profile can be combined with the profiles
from series 50 and the roller carriage shown on the
next page. When combined, they form a linear unit.

11

Profile guide PF 16-38.44 Profile guide PF 16-38.44/61

B51.04.004 B51.04.016

6.8 kg/m With adapter profile

L1 up to 6000 mm
8.8 kg/m
L1 up to 6000 mm

Borehole spacing specifications 450 ≤ L1 < 6000

150 ≤ L1 < 450

Range of app.: 150 ≤ L1 < 450 450 ≤ L1 < 6000
25 ≤ A < 75 125 ≤ A < 225

N= ( L1-(2 x A)
100
)
+1 x 2 N = (
L1-(2 x A)
200
+3 x 2 )
L1 = length of the profile guide
A = distance from the first borehole to the profile edge
N = number of screws

370 Linear Units and Modules

Roller Carriage LW 38.44-04
for Profile Guide PF 16-38.44/61

M8x16
M8x16

11

Technical Values

L1 Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0 mcarriage Plate, individual

Item no. Designation [mm] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [kg]

B90.50.044 LW 38.44-04 250 1600 4000 80 360 150 5.5 5009CI0250

B90.50.044 LW 38.44-04 450 1600 4000 80 760 300 8.5 5009CI0450

 ax. load specifications for v ≤ 10 m/s and a ≤ 10 m/s2; with s0 = 4

M
Max. acceleration a = 50 m/s2 with reduced load
Load application point max. 30 mm off-centre
For X46 Cr13 rods and rollers, the load capacity must be reduced by 30%

Linear Units and Modules 371

 Series 60 Linear Units

Profile guide PF 16-38.36

The profile guide PF 16-38.36 can be combined
with the profiles from series 60 and the roller
carriage shown on the next page. When combined,
they form a linear unit.

11

Profile guide PF 16-38.36

B51.04.109

9.5 kg/m
L1 up to 6000 mm

Borehole spacing specifications L1 ≥ 450

150 ≤ L1 < 450
Range of app.: 150 ≤ L1 < 450 450 ≤ L1 < 6000
25 ≤ A < 75 125 ≤ A < 225

N= ( L1-(2 x A)
100
)
+1 x 2 N= ( L1-(2 x A)
200
)
+3 x 22

L1 = length of the profile guide

A = distance from the first borehole to the profile edge
N = number of screws

372 Linear Units and Modules

Roller Carriage LW 38.36-04
For profile guide PF 16-38.36

M8x16
M8x16

11

Technical Values

L1 Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0 mcarriage Plate, individual

Item no. Designation [mm] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [kg]

B90.60.042 LW 38.36-04 280 1600 4000 100 420 170 6.5 5009CL0280

B90.60.042 LW 38.36-04 480 1600 4000 100 820 330 10 5009CL0480

 ax. load specifications for v ≤ 10 m/s and a ≤ 10 m/s2; with s0 = 4

M
Max. acceleration a = 50 m/s2 with reduced load
Load application point max. 30 mm off-centre
For X46 Cr13 rods and rollers, the load capacity must be reduced by 30%

Linear Units and Modules 373

 Linear Modules LZR

Linear modules with timing belts (LZR) have a

modular design and are installed on the track roller
assemblies. Their basic components include the
mounting profile, profile guide and carriage plate
and the timing belt drive components required to
transmit power, such as the pulleys and connectors.

The LZR design facilitates the attachment of motors

as standard. With the appropriately drilled shafts,
the pulleys allow the motor to be attached directly
on any side. In addition, shaft ends for flanged
mounting of a gearmotor with a hollow shaft,
­adaptations with a motor flange and coupling
and an indirect drive are available on request.

For electromotive drives using a stepper motor or

Order designation servomotor, we recommend using the optional
single-piece drive shafts.
 LZR 2025-38.20-16
System designation The linear modules can be combined in two-axis
and three-axis systems and in area gantries and
Mounting profile three-dimensional gantries.

Clamping profile
Level of Accuracy that
Timing belt width
can be achieved by Linear
Modules with Timing Belts
11 The LZR with a 8M-30-type timing belt can achieve
the following values ​​without a load:
Repeatability: 0.1 mm
Positioning accuracy: +
_ 0.2 mm
Reversal error: 0.2 mm
These values vary depending on the stroke length
Sample order and application.

Linear module LZR 2025-38.20-16

Item no. B38.25.001

Stroke = .....mm

Length L = .....mm

Roller carriage length L1 = .....mm

Drive shaft borehole ø = .....mm

Travel speed v = .....m/s

Acceleration a = .....m/s2

374 Linear Units and Modules

Notes on the Motor Selection/
Load Specifications Drive Design
For information about load specifications for track For the drive selection, several factors must be
roller assemblies, refer to the information beginning considered, including the timing belt (especially the
on page 42. allowable belt pull strength and required stiffness)
and the motor (especially the starting torque, the re­
Notes on the Load Specifications for Timing Belts volutions per minute and the resulting performance).
The standard timing belts used are PU (polyurethane) The most important consideration is the required
with steel cord tension members. Other types, driving force. As a simple starting point for the
including conductive belts, are available on request. calculations, the transition point from acceleration
The maximum track roller assembly travel speed to constant speed can be used.
of v = 10 m/s can be achieved using timing belts
with no reduction of the load capacities. Constant acceleration
(a = constant):
From a > 10 m/s2
onwards, the values must be
reduced by the usual load factors (e.g. without load v=a·t= 2·a·s
peaks s = 1 to high load peaks s = 2.5).
Constant speed (v = constant):
The allowable tension loads are based on a 0.4% s
elongation of the timing belt. v=
t
The breaking strength of the belts is significantly
Max. driving force:
higher. The normal usable belt pull strength (Fu)
and required pretension (Fv) is approximately: FDrive = Fa + FRoll + FEmpty + FAdditional
Fa = m · (a+g)
Fallowable = Fv + Fu with Fv = Fu
with m = moving mass in kg
a = const. acceleration in m/s²
g = 10 m/s², for vertical travel
g = 0 m/s², for horizontal travel
Timing Belts AT 5-16 5M-15 8M-30 11
FRoll = FN · µRoll
Fbreaking 3900 N 3600 N 14900 N
with FN = FG for horizontal travel
Fallowable 1200 N 1150 N 4000 N µRoll = 0.05 for lightly preloaded track roller
FEmpty = 50 to 100 N depending on the module
Fv = Fu 600 N 575 N 2000 N and pre-tension of the timing belt
FAdditional = additional loads from the application
The usable starting torque results from the maxi­ FDrive = m · (a+g) + FN · 0.05 + 100 N + FAdditional
mum usable belt pull strength, of the engaged teeth
and the pitch diameter of the timing belt pulley. For timing belt selection:
Indicated FDrive < Fu

For motor selection:

The values for the mk LZR modules are: F D [m]
Mreq = Drive ·2 Pitch
·h
Timing belt AT 5-16 5M-15 8M-30 v · 60
nreq = DPitch [m]· p
DPitch 41.4 mm 50.9 mm 71.3 mm
F ·v
Preq = Drive
h
Z 26 32 28

MDrive 12 Nm 15 Nm 70 Nm With DPitch in m of timing belt pulley h = 50 too 75%

depending on selected drive (gearbox, motor,
etc.)
v in m/s

Linear Units and Modules 375

 Linear Modules LZR

LZR 2000-38.41-15 with Plate Carriage

Option of borehole ø 12 H7, ø 14 H7, Timing belt pulley 5M-15

with keyway DIN 6885 Dpitch = 50.9 mm, Z = 32

4 x M8 x 20-bolt circle ø 80 A

Optional plate 50.02.0020

Stroke*

L=Stroke+L1+210

11
View A-A

Load Specifications for LZR 2000-38.41-15 with Plate Carriage

L1 Fx** Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0
Item no. [mm] [N] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm]
B38.02.003 150 1150 1000 2000 25 100 50

B38.02.003 250 1150 1000 2000 25 200 100

* Maximum stroke between the mechanical stops. Note the discharge section!
** Fx = Fallowable; Fu = 575 N = Fv

376 Linear Units and Modules

LZR 2000-38.41-15 with Side Mounted Plate Carriage

Option of borehole ø 12 H7, ø 14 H7, Timing belt pulley 5M-15

with keyway DIN 6885 Dpitch = 50.9 mm, Z = 32

4 x M8 x 20-bolt circle ø 80
A

Optional plate 50.02.0020

Stroke*

L=Stroke+L1+210

View A-A 11

Load Specifications for LZR 2000-38.41-15 with Side Mounted Plate Carriage
L1 Fx** Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0
Item no. [mm] [N] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm]
B38.02.007 250 1150 1000 2000 25 200 100

* Maximum stroke between the mechanical stops. Note the discharge section!
** Fx = Fallowable; Fu = 575 N = Fv

Linear Units and Modules 377

 Linear Modules LZR

LZR 2004-38.41-30 with Plate Carriage

Option of borehole ø 19 H7, ø 20 H7, Timing belt pulley 8M-30

ø 25 H7 with keyway DIN 6885 Dpitch = 71.3 mm, Z = 28

4 x M8 x 20-bolt circle ø 100

A

Optional plate 50.02.0027

Stroke*

L=Stroke+L1+255

11
View A-A

Load Specifications for LZR 2004-38.41-30 with Plate Carriage

L1 Fx** Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0
Item no. [mm] [N] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm]
B38.02.004 150 4000 1000 2000 25 100 50

B38.02.004 250 4000 1000 2000 25 200 100

* Maximum stroke between the mechanical stops. Note the discharge section!
** Fx = Fallowable; Fu = 2000 N = Fv

378 Linear Units and Modules

LZR 2004-38.44-30 with Side Mounted Plate Carriage

Option of borehole ø 19 H7, ø 20 H7, Timing belt pulley 8M-30

ø 25 H7 with keyway DIN 6885 Dpitch = 71.3 mm, Z = 28
4 x M8 x 20-bolt circle ø 100
A

Optional plate 50.02.0027

Stroke*
L=Stroke+L1+255

11
View A-A

Load Specifications for LZR 2004-38.44-30 with Side Mounted Plate Carriage
L1 Fx** Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0
Item no. [mm] [N] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm]
B38.02.005 250 4000 1600 4000 80 350 150

B38.02.005 450 4000 1600 4000 80 760 300

* Maximum stroke between the mechanical stops. Note the discharge section!
** Fx = Fallowable; Fu = 2000 N = Fv

Linear Units and Modules 379

 Linear Modules LZR

LZR 2005-38.44-30 with Plate Carriage

Option of borehole ø 19 H7, ø 20 H7, Timing belt pulley 8M-30

ø 25 H7 with keyway DIN 6885 Dpitch = 71.3 mm, Z = 28

4 x M8 x 20-bolt circle ø 100

A

Optional plate 50.02.0027

Stroke*

11 L=Stroke+L1+255

View A-A

Load Specifications for LZR 2005-38.44-30 with Plate Carriage

L1 Fx** Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0
Item no. [mm] [N] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm]
B38.02.006 250 4000 1600 4000 80 350 150

B38.02.006 450 4000 1600 4000 80 760 300

* Maximum stroke between the mechanical stops. Note the discharge section!
** Fx = Fallowable; Fu = 2000 N = Fv

380 Linear Units and Modules

LZR 2005-38.44-30 with Side Mounted Plate Carriage

Option of borehole ø 19 H7, ø 20 H7, ø Timing belt pulley 8M-30

25 H7 with keyway DIN 6885 Dpitch = 71.3 mm, Z = 28
4 x M8 x 20-bolt circle ø 100

Optional plate 50.02.0027

Stroke*
L=Stroke+L1+255

View A-A 11

Load Specifications for LZR 2005-38.44-30 with Side Mounted Plate Carriage
L1 Fx** Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0
Item no. [mm] [N] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm]
B38.02.009 250 4000 1600 4000 80 350 150

B38.02.009 450 4000 1600 4000 80 760 300

* Maximum stroke between the mechanical stops. Note the discharge section!
** Fx = Fallowable; Fu = 2000 N = Fv

Linear Units and Modules 381

 Linear Modules LZR

LZR 2011-38.44-30 with Plate Carriage

Option of borehole ø 19 H7, ø 20 H7, ø 25 Timing belt pulley 8M-30

H7 with keyway DIN 6885 Dpitch = 71.3 mm, Z = 28

4 x M8 x 20-bolt circle ø 100

A

Optional plate 50.02.0027

Stroke*

11 L=Stroke+L1+255

View A-A

Load Specifications for LZR 2011-38.44-30 with Plate Carriage

L1 Fx** Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0
Item no. [mm] [N] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm]
B38.02.011 250 4000 1600 4000 80 350 150

B38.02.011 450 4000 1600 4000 80 760 300

* Maximum stroke between the mechanical stops. Note the discharge section!
** Fx = Fallowable; Fu = 2000 N = Fv

382 Linear Units and Modules

LZR 2011-38.44-30 with Side Mounted Plate Carriage

Option of borehole ø 19 H7, ø 20 H7, ø 25 Timing belt pulley 8M-30

H7 with keyway DIN 6885 Dpitch = 71.3 mm, Z = 28
4 x M8 x 20-bolt circle ø 100

Optional plate 50.02.0027

Stroke*
L=Stroke+L1+255

View A-A 11

Load Specifications for LZR 2011-38.44-30 with Side Mounted Plate Carriage
L1 Fx** Fy0 Fz0 Mx0 My0 Mz0
Item no. [mm] [N] [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm]
B38.02.010 250 4000 1600 4000 80 350 150

B38.02.010 450 4000 1600 4000 80 760 300

* Maximum stroke between the mechanical stops. Note the discharge section!
** Fx = Fallowable; Fu = 2000 N = Fv

Linear Units and Modules 383

 Recirculating Ball Bearing Guides

» Compact linear units

with recirculating
ball bearing guide. «

Recirculating ball bearing guides feature high

load capacity along with outstanding precision.
They have a very compact design. The recircu-
lating ball bearing units can bear loads along
multiple axes and are extremely stiff thanks to
the steel rails mounted on the guide profile.

A recirculating ball bearing unit consists of a

track and a guide carriage with four rows of
interior ball bearings, which are recirculated
in closed channels with plastic recirculation
mechanisms. The recirculating ball bearing
unit’s roller carriage consists of hardened,
11 ground steel and can be slid directly from
the guard rail onto the track.

Our standard guide carriages are lightly pre-

tensioned, making them suitable for most
common applications. You may require higher
pre-tension or no pre-tension, depending on
your requirements. The guide carriages are
custom-tailored to your specific conditions.

384 Linear Units and Modules

Benefits of mk Recirculating
Ball Bearing Guides

High load capacity and high stiffness

Compact design
Just one track for different types of roller carriage
 ightly pre-tensioned (standard), available with
L
play or high pre-tension
Medium to high acceleration up to a = 30m/s²
Medium to high speed up to v = 5 m/s
 our-row multi-axial recirculating ball bearing guide
F 11
bears loads in all directions (forces and torques)
High precision with appropriate contact surfaces

Linear Units and Modules 385

 Recirculating Ball Bearing Guides

Recirculating
Ball Bearing Units
General design
mk recirculating ball bearing units consist of a track
and the guide carriage.
The roller carriage for the recirculating ball bearing
unit is made from hardened and ground steel.
Closed channels with plastic recirculation mecha-
nisms recirculate the four rows of ball bearings.
The roller carriage can be slid directly from the
guard rail onto the track.
The recirculating ball bearing units can carry loads
from any direction and have very rigid, heavy-duty
linear guides.
The standard mk guide carriages are lightly pre-
tensioned, making them suitable for most common
applications. If multiple carriages are arranged on
a rail or in parallel, then we recommend using car-
riages with no pre-tension and little play to provide
better misalignment compensation and ease of
movement.
For products with high rigidity or fluctuating loads,
we recommend carriages with strong pre-tension
and precise, rigid contact surfaces. mk can supply
11 these versions on request.
The specified maximum load specifications already
take into account a static safety factor of s0 = 5 in
Sample order for a guide relation to plastic deformation on the roller contact,
and s0 = 2 for screw connections with 8.8 screws.
Recirculating ball bearing guide KU 25.10

Item no. B51.04.404

Size = .....mm

Length L = .....mm

Sample order for a carriage

Guide carriage KU 25.11

Item no. K116041125

Size = .....mm

Carriage Normal

386 Linear Units and Modules

Notes

11

Linear Units and Modules 387

 Recirculating Ball Bearing Guides

Recirculating Ball Bearing

Guide KU 25.10
The track KU 25.10 must be combined into one unit
with the guide carriages KU 25.11 and KU 25.13.
However, they must be ordered individually.

The KU 25.10 track is especially suitable for Series

40 and 50. Due to its small contact surface, it is not
suitable for the 14 mm slot in Series 60.

Cylinder head screw M6x20 D0912620

11
Track KU 25.10
K116041025
m = 2.7 kg/m Track KU 25.10 with
mounting elements
B51.04.404

Borehole spacing specifications

Support rail, L up to 1980 mm, single piece
Scope of application for A: 20 ≤ A < 50

L1-(2 x A)
N= +1 (+1 per joint)
60
L1 = length of the support rail
A = distance from the first borehole to the profile edge (symmetrical)
N = number of screws

388 Linear Units and Modules

Guide Carriages
Guide carriage, normal Guide carriage, narrow
KU 25.11 KU 25.13

M8 M8 M6

B B1

11

B= through-bore for screw M6 DIN 6912

B1= through-bore for screw M6 DIN EN ISO 4762

Load specifications
Fy0 Fz0* Mx0 My0 Mz0 C0 C0 mcarriage
Item no. Designation [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [N] [N] [kg]

K116041125 KU 25.11 7000 7000 75 75 75 37,000 17,900 0.71

K116041325 KU 25.13 7000 7000 75 75 75 37,000 17,900 0.56

*Lateral load without close fit,

only frictional connection on design profile with screw 8.8 – reduced to 2000N

Linear Units and Modules 389

 Recirculating Ball Bearing Guides

Recirculating Ball
Bearing Guide KU 30.10
The track KU 30.10 must be combined into one unit
with the guide carriages KU 30.11 and KU 30.13.
However, they must be ordered individually.

The KU 30.10 track is especially suitable for Series 60.

Cylinder head screw M8x30 D0912830

11
Track KU 30.10
K116041030
m = 4.3 kg/m

Track KU 30.10 with

mounting elements
B51.04.406

Borehole spacing specifications

Support rail, L1 up to 2000 mm, single piece
Scope of application for A: 20 ≤ A < 60

L1-(2 x A)
N= +1 (+1 per joint)
80
L1 = length of the support rail
A = distance from the first borehole to the profile edge (symmetrical)
N = number of screws

390 Linear Units and Modules

Guide Carriages
Guide carriage, normal Guide carriage, narrow
KU 30.11 KU 30.13

M10 M10 M8

B B1

11

B= through-bore for screw M8 DIN 6912

B1= through-bore for screw M8 DIN EN ISO 4762

Load specifications
Fy0 Fz0* Mx0 My0 Mz0 C0 C0 mcarriage
Item no. Designation [N] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [N] [N] [kg]

K116041130 KU 30.11 10000 10000 140 140 140 55,000 27,500 1.4

K116041330 KU 30.13 10000 10000 140 140 140 55,000 27,500 1.09

*Lateral load without close fit,

only frictional connection on structural profile with screw 8.8 – reduced to 3500N

Linear Units and Modules 391

 Application Examples

Dual VST 2015 with coupling via timing belts for width
adjustment of the ZRF-P 2040.02 cycle conveyor

11

Dual VST 2015 with manual digital System 2015 adjusting units with
display for adjusting the stop bar handwheel and scale

392 Linear Units and Modules

 Electromotive VST 2015 with Dual electromotive VST 2015 for automatic width
recirculating ball bearing guide adjustment with scanning via safety limit switch

11

Dual VST 2015 with parallel recirculating Manual two-axis adjustment system for
ball bearing guide for supporting the load holding a marking device with VST 2015

Linear Units and Modules 393

 Application Examples

Dual VST 2011 for manual lane width

adjustment on a side conveyor

11

VST 2011 adjusting unit used for semi-automatic Electromotive VST 2011 with custom
conveyor width adjustment in a chain conveyor system measuring system on LZR 2005-38.44-30

394 Linear Units and Modules

 VST 2011 with two counter-rotating slide carriages and digital display for adjusting
the width of the pneumatic centring unit on the modular belt conveyor

11

VST 2011-H with handwheel as add-on kit for System mk 2011 adjusting
the belt conveyor with incline adjustment unit for brush cantilever

Linear Units and Modules 395

 Application Examples

Horizontal slides comprised of linear module

type LZR 2005-38.44-30 with fork grippers and swivel unit for
moving and emptying workpiece baskets

11

Linear module type LZR 2005-38.44-30 as Double-LZR 2005-38.44-30 with side

a direct length measuring system with mounted carriage plate and
measuring head on the roller carriage cantilever for conveyor as lift

396 Linear Units and Modules

 Pneumatic linear module with PF 38.77 and LW 38.77-44
as a transfer unit with 10 vacuum suction grippers

11

Linear unit LZR 2004-38.41-30 as a Linear unit LZR 2004-38.41-30

height adjustment unit for an assembly drive coupled via a slip clutch
and testing workstation

Linear Units and Modules 397

 Application Examples

LZR Series 60 linear module based on the mk 2060.07

profile with track rollers and rails from Rollon

11

Linear module with chain for HT range and in Gantry with LZR 2005 on foamed com-
ESD version Product intake with pneumatic lift bined profile Roller carriage with support
for lifting/depositing before, in and after the oven rollers as cross-carriage with LZR 2005
and Omega drive as X-Z surface gantry

398 Linear Units and Modules

 Base LZR 2005-38.44-30 with side roller carriage on Linear module type LZR 2005-38.44-30 with motor
foamed combined profile as gantry, with support rol- and controller as a lift with a belt conveyor
lers for torque loads and manual VST 2011 as Z axis

11

Linear module type LZR 2004-38.41-30 with absolute

value rotary encoder mounted on the tail

Linear Units and Modules 399

 Application Examples

Dual LZR 2005-38.44 with cantilever for dual ZRF-P 2010 for
lift and transfer from a dual ZRF-P as a lift-and-transfer module

11

Dual-axis linear module comprising LZR 2004-38.41-30 with

LZR 2011-38.44.30 with side mounted carriage plate servo gearmotor from Infranor

400 Linear Units and Modules

Dual LZR 2005 as lift in steel rack Dual linear module type LZR 2005-38.44-30
with cantilever for conveyor as a lifting unit

11

Three-axis gantry with driven linear modules, gripper and controller

Linear Units and Modules 401

 Application Examples

Two-dimensional gantry with vacuum gripper as a handling and loading system for
steel. Two independent loading systems on a common X axis with gear rack with
track rollers and riding rack drive

11

X-Z gantry with gripper for transferring crankshafts. X-Z axis combination with pneumatic drive
X axis as LZR with support roller and timing belts, Z and vacuum grippers for loading
axis with timing belt Omega drive and fall arrest and unloading beverage crates

402 Linear Units and Modules

 Gantry stand with Horizontal axis with foamed Lift for storage system
telescopic gripper unit combined profile for reinforcement

11

X-Z gantry with additional Short stroke lift based on

pneumatic weight balancing as PF-38.44 linear guide system
a holder for a vacuum gripping system

Linear Units and Modules 403

 Application Examples

Lift station for lifting and lowering conveyors on two conveyor levels. Cross-conveyor
unit with recirculating ball bearing guides positioned horizontally in the frame

11

Recirculating ball bearing guide for manual lane width adjustment

and for clamping the pneumatic centring device and electromotive rotating unit

404 Linear Units and Modules

 Lifting unit with KU 25 recirculating ball bearing
guide and angle bracket

11

Shuttle system with rotary indexing table Frame for stress testing based on
for pallet transport, guided via a double linear KU 30.10 recirculating ball bearing guide
axis with recirculating ball bearing guide

Linear Units and Modules 405

 Application Examples

Gantry for handling sleeves. The X axis is moved by a dual linear

module with a KU 30.30 recirculating ball bearing guide

11

Lifting unit with LZR with recirculating Two-track feed for machine loading.
ball bearing guide KU 25 with profile cantilever The separator can be adjusted for various diameters
for supporting the ZRF-P 2010 conveyor using a recirculating ball bearing guide

406 Linear Units and Modules

 Timing chain conveyor with alignment unit for
camshafts using recirculating ball bearing guide

11

Transfer shuttle with pallet carriers, LZR with recirculating ball bearing guide
carriage with recirculating ball bearing guide

Linear Units and Modules 407

 Chapter 12 Application Examples of System Solutions

» System solutions
for transferring,
interlinking and handling. «
mk transfer and handling systems provide you with
reliable and practical system solutions. Designed
according to your needs, we optimise your manu­
facturing and assembly processes.

Standardised transfer systems

Versamove is a transfer system for transporting

pallets that can be optimally tailored to the cus­
tomer’s specific requirements. Divided into three
weight and size classes, it always has the right
system for any application. With its modular con­
struction and compatibility with other systems
on the market, it can be used for a broad range
of applications.

The SPU 2040 accumulating pallet recirculation

system with automatic pallet return is suitable for
cost-effective interlinking, feeding, buffering, posi­
tioning and separation of workpieces in the tightest
of spaces. Pallets are transported from above and
then conveyed back suspended below the transport
12 level once the workpieces have been removed.

The robust TKU 2040 chain conveyor system with

optional adjustable width for various workpieces
is especially well suited for cycled, defined and
position-oriented supply and removal as well as
for interlinking machines and machining centres.

Handling Systems

mk handling systems are built from our linear tech­

nology components as standard. Examples include
multi-axis gantry systems with linear modules and
custom grippers. They can be used as pick-and-
place units in combination with transfer systems,
or they can be used as a standalone solution.

408 Application Examples of System Solutions

Benefits of
mk System Solutions SPU 2040

 fficient solutions for conveying, feeding,

E
interlinking, sorting, buffering, separating,
rotating, loading and unloading
 ased on our proven construction kit of
B
profile, conveyor and linear technology
 lanning, design, assembly and start-up
P
of turnkey systems
 aintenance and service agreements with
M
choice of various response times
Locations worldwide for local support
TKU 2040
 uaranteed supply of spare parts from
G
reputable international suppliers 12
 xtensive industry references in the auto­
E
motive, electrical, food, pharmaceutical,
home appliance, machine tool, packaging
and plastics industries

Handling Systems

Application Examples of System Solutions 409

 Application Examples

Versamove standard pallet circulation system with FPF-P 2045

curved flat top chain conveyor and custom workpiece holder

12

Versamove standard pallet circulation system Versamove plus turnkey pallet system
with compact 180° KER 320 curved section in assembly automation

410 Application Examples of System Solutions

 Versamove standard with flat top chain conveyor
and lift-and-transfer conveyors

12

Lift-and-transfer conveyor with Lift-and-transfer conveyor with chain

coupled drive and central stroke unit for and coupled drive for the automatic removal of
bridging very short transverse sections products with indexing from below

Application Examples of System Solutions 411

 Application Examples

Separation of pallets from the main line in

two parallel cross conveyor tracks

12

Electrically driven lift in Lift that is accessible from three sides,

“stand-alone” frame with guarding with rotating assembly in the lift carriage
and feed via a Versamove ultra

412 Application Examples of System Solutions

 Versamove plus with large custom pallets

12

Lift-and-transfer conveyor in parallel arrangement Versamove plus with custom pallet

with support roller for bridging small gaps

Application Examples of System Solutions 413

 Application Examples for SPU 2040

SPU accumulating pallet circulation system with pallet separation

function as a feed for parts for a production system

12

Interlink of dual-line pallet circulation system SPU double-line as an infeed

with GUF-P 2000 belt conveyor conveyor for dishwasher housings
as a discharge conveyor for faulty parts

414 Application Examples of System Solutions

 SPU with separator function for loading
by hand and removal by robot

12

SPU double-line 114 system Single-line SPU with custom pallet holder
with custom pallet

Application Examples of System Solutions 415

 Application Examples for TKU 2040

TKU as dual-line system with

custom profile pallets and holders

12

TKU 2040 with special adjusting unit for TKU 2040 with 20° inclination and transport
adjusting the distance between the conveyor chains of workpieces through a cleansing bath

416 Application Examples of System Solutions

 TKU 2040 indexing chain conveyor system with custom workpiece
holder and centring system for the automotive industry

12

TKU 2040 for transporting camshafts TKU 2040 for transporting camshafts with a spiralled
with positioning sensors cover as a protective guard on the connecting shaft

Application Examples of System Solutions 417

 Application Examples for Handling Systems

Pivoting conveyor system with integrated slug clamping, that picks off and
clamps blow moulded parts on the machine and transports them away.

12

Modul-Con circulation system – the transport System for filling boxes with interlinking of an
medium is a 3/4" vertical hollow pin upstream tube filling station and integration of the
chain arranged between the wear strips provided scale with a discharge for defective boxes.

418 Application Examples of System Solutions

 Turnkey interlink system, including controller and protective device guard
with integrated robot island and melting ovens

12

The pallet is transported in and out Production cell with paternoster

of a production cell through a double-line storage for infed and discharged parts
timing belt conveyor

Application Examples of System Solutions 419

 Application Examples for Handling Systems

Handling and loading system for large parts

12

Marriage station for two production lines Transport in and out for a customer’s
measuring and packaging unit

420 Application Examples of System Solutions

 Automated interlink with pallets, including rotating, stopping,
separating and centring, based on flat top chain conveyor

12

RBT-P 2255 roller conveyor as a storage conveyor XYZ handling gantry for stacking and unstacking
with central loading and unloading tasks product pallets and euro pallets

Application Examples of System Solutions 421

Index – By Search Terms

Accessories, chain conveyors 216 Chain conveyors; application examples 220

Accessories, drip pan 305 Chain conveyors; pallets 216
Accessories, end stop 304 Chains 214
Accessories, timing belt conveyors 172 Chains for KTF-P 2010 214
Accumulating roller chain Chains for SRF-P 2010 and SRF-P 2012 215
conveyor SRF-P 2010 196 Chapter on belt conveyors 18
Accumulating roller chain Chapter on chain conveyors 182
conveyor SRF-P 2012 206 Chapter on conveyor technology accessories 278
Adapter profiles 348 Chapter on flat top chain conveyors 226
Adjustable side rails 295 Chapter on linear units and modules 318
Adjusting units VST 2011 328 Chapter on modular belt conveyors 116
Adjusting units VST 2015 324 Chapter on notes on linear technology 314
Application examples for belt conveyors 96 Chapter on roller conveyors 244
Application examples for chain conveyors 220 Chapter on rotary tables 272
Application examples for Chapter on system solutions 408
conveyor technology accessories 306 Chapter on timing belt conveyors 152
Application examples for flat top Clamping profiles 346
chain conveyors 238 Cleats and side walls 92
Application examples for handling systems 418 Configuration SBF-P 2254 230
Application examples for linear technology 392 Conveyor stand fastening elements, stands 280
Application examples for Conveyor technology accessories 278
linear units and modules 392 Conveyor technology accessories;
Application examples for application examples 306
modular belt conveyors 146 Conveyor technology configurator 16
Application examples for roller conveyors 266 Curved belt conveyor KGF-P 2040 80
Application examples for rotary tables 276 Curved modular belt conveyor KMF-P 2040 130
Application examples for SPU 2040 414 Curved section, RBM-P 2255 263
Application examples for Curved section, RBS-P 2065/2066 251
timing belt conveyors 176 Curved section, RBS-P 2255 255
Application examples for TKU 2040 416 Curved section, RBT-P 2255 259
Application examples for Versamove 410 DGF-P 2001 84
Assembly aid for chain replacement 217 DGF-P 2001; drive version AC 86
Belt conveyor, GUF-P 2000 36 DGF-P 2001; pallet 87
Belt conveyor, GUF-P 2004 62 Double belt conveyor DGF-P 2001 84
Belt conveyor, GUF-P 2041 52 Drip pan 305
Belt conveyor, GUF-P 2045 32 Drive roller conveyor RBM-P 2255 260
Belt conveyor, GUF-P MINI 22 Drive roller conveyor, curved section;
Belt conveyor; application examples 96 RBM-P 2255 263
Belt conveyor; cleats and side walls 92 Drive roller conveyor, RBM-P 2255 260
Belt conveyors 18 Drive roller conveyor, straight section;
Belts 88 RBM-P 2255 262
Benefits of mk conveyor technology 6 DTZ-P 2040, rotary table 274
Benefits of mk linear technology 314 Electrical components 302
Chain conveyor maintenance kit 217 End stops 304
Chain conveyor, KTF-P 2010 186 Features of mk track roller assemblies 334
Chain conveyors 182 Fixed side rails 294
Chain conveyors; accessories 216 Flat top chain conveyor 226

422
Flat top chain conveyor; application examples 238 GUF-P MINI; drive version AG 27
Flat top chain conveyor; modular overview 231 GUF-P MINI; drive version BA 28
Flat top chains, SBF-P 2254 234 GUF-P MINI; drive version BC 29
Floor fastening element for single stand 283 GUF-P MINI; tails 29
Gliding assemblies 320 Guide rods 351
Gravity roller conveyor RBS-P 2065/2066 248 Guide rollers 350
Gravity roller conveyor RBS-P 2255 252 Handling systems; application examples 418
Gravity roller conveyor, curve; RBS-P 2066 251 Head drives, DGF-P 2001 86
Gravity roller conveyor, curve; RBS-P 2255 255 Head drives, GUF-P 2000 38
Gravity roller conveyor, straight section; Head drives, GUF-P 2004 64
-RBS-P 2065/2066 250 Head drives, GUF-P 2041 54
Gravity roller conveyor, straight section; Head drives, GUF-P MINI 24
-RBS-P 2255 254 Head drives, KFG-P 2000 72
GUF-P 2000, belt conveyor 36 Head drives, KFM-P 2040 126
GUF-P 2000; drive version AA 38 Head drives, KFS-P 2040.86 138
GUF-P 2000; drive version AC 39 Head drives, KMF-P 2040 134
GUF-P 2000; drive version AF 40 Head drives, KTF-P 2010 188
GUF-P 2000; drive version AG 41 Head drives, MBF-P 2040 122
GUF-P 2000; drive version AM 42 Head drives, SRF-P 2010 198
GUF-P 2000; drive version AS 43 Head drives, SRF-P 2012 208
GUF-P 2000; drive version AU 44 Head drives, ZRF-P 2010 162
GUF-P 2000; drive version BA 45 Head drives, ZRF-P 2040 158
GUF-P 2000; drive version BC 46 Hinged plate belts 145
GUF-P 2000; drive version BF 47 Incline conveyor belt 70
GUF-P 2000; drive version CA 48 Incline conveyor hinged plate belt 136
GUF-P 2000; tails 49 Incline conveyor modular belt 124
GUF-P 2004, belt conveyor 62 Individual components of side rails 297
GUF-P 2004; drive version AA 64 Individual components of
GUF-P 2004; drive version AC 65 track roller assemblies 346
GUF-P 2004; drive version AM 66 Initiators 303
GUF-P 2004; drive version AS 67 Internal drive, GUF-P 2045 34
GUF-P 2004; tails 68 Internal drives, GUF-P 2000 48
GUF-P 2041, belt conveyor 52 Internal drives, GUF-P 2041 59
GUF-P 2041; drive version AA 54 KFG-P 2000 ECO; variants 77
GUF-P 2041; drive version AC 55 KFG-P 2000, incline conveyor belt 70
GUF-P 2041; drive version AF 56 KFG-P 2000; drive version AC 72
GUF-P 2041; drive version AS 57 KFG-P 2000; drive version AF 73
GUF-P 2041; drive version BC 58 KFG-P 2000; drive version AS 74
GUF-P 2041; drive version CA 59 KFG-P 2000; drive version AU 75
GUF-P 2041; tails 60 KFG-P 2000; side rail 79
GUF-P 2045, belt conveyor 32 KFG-P 2000; stand type ECO 78
GUF-P 2045; drive version CA 34 KFG-P 2040, incline conveyor modular belt 124
GUF-P 2045; tails 35 KFM-P 2040; drive version AC 126
GUF-P MINI, belt conveyor 22 KFM-P 2040; drive version AS 127
GUF-P MINI; drive version AA 24 KFM-P 2040; stands 128
GUF-P MINI; drive version AC 25 KFS-P 2040.86, incline conveyor
GUF-P MINI; drive version AD 26 hinged plate belt 136

423
Index – By Search Terms

KFS-P 2040.86; drive version AC 138 Modular belts 142

KFS-P 2040.86; drive version AS 139 Modular belts for KFS-P 2040.86 145
KFS-P 2040.86; side rails 141 Modular belts for KMF-P 2040 144
KFS-P 2040.86; stands 140 Modular belts for MBF-P 2040 142
KGF-P 2040, curved belt conveyor 80 Modular overview, SBF-P 2254 231
KGF-P 2040; drive version BC 82 Mounting profiles 336
KGF-P 2040; stands 83 Notes on conveyor technology 6
KMF-P 2040, curved modular belt conveyor 130 Notes on linear technology 314
KMF-P 2040; drive versions 134 Nuts 300
KMF-P 2040; properties 132 Retrofit nuts 301
KMF-P 2040; variants 133 Other accessories 304
KTF-P 2010 186 Other conveyor technology accessories 304
KTF-P 2010; drive version AA 188 Pad options 281
KTF-P 2010; drive version AC 189 Pallets, chain conveyors 216
KTF-P 2010; drive version AF 190 Pallets, DGF-P 2001 87
KTF-P 2010; drive version AS 191 Pallets, timing belt conveyors 172
KTF-P 2010; drive version BC 192 Profile guide PF 10-38.31/55 358
KTF-P 2010; drive version BF 193 Profile guide PF 10-38.32/56 360
KTF-P 2010; wear strips 194 Profile guide PF 10-38.41/60 368
Line RBM-P 2255 262 Profile guide PF 10-38.77 (internal) 366
Line RBS-P 2065/2066 250 Profile guide PF 16-38.33/56 362
Line RBS-P 2255 254 Profile guide PF 16-38.36 372
Line RBT-P 2255 258 Profile guide PF 16-38.44/61 370
Linear modules, LZR 374 Profile guide PF 6-38.20/50 352
Linear technology; application examples 392 Profile guide PF 6-38.21 354
Linear units 352 Profile guide PF 6-38.30/55 356
Linear units and modules 318 Profile guide PF 6-38.75 (internal) 364
Linear units and modules; QuickDesigner – the conveyor
application examples 392 technology configurator 16
Lower belt drives, GUF-P 2000 45 RBM-P 2255, drive roller conveyor,
Lower belt drives, GUF-P 2041 58 curved section 262
Lower belt drives, GUF-P MINI 28 RBM-P 2255, drive roller conveyor,
Lower belt drives, KGF-P 2040 82 straight section 282
Lower belt drives, ZRF-P 2010 166 RBM-P 2255, roller conveyor, drive roller 260
Lower run drives, KTF-P 2010 192 RBS-P 2065/2066, gravity roller conveyor 248
Lower run drives, SRF-P 2010 202 RBS-P 2065/2066, gravity roller conveyor,
Lower run drives, SRF-P 2012 211 straight section 250
LZR 2000-38.41-15, linear module 376 RBS-P 2066, gravity roller conveyor,
LZR 2004-38.41-30, linear module 378 curved section 251
LZR 2005-38.44-30, linear module 380 RBS-P 2255, gravity roller conveyor 252
LZR 2011-38.44-30, linear module 382 RBS-P 2255, gravity roller conveyor,
MBF-P 2040, modular belt conveyor 120 curved section 255
MBF-P 2040; drive version AC 122 RBS-P 2255, gravity roller conveyor,
MBF-P 2040; drive version AS 123 straight section 254
Modular belt conveyors 116 RBS-P 2255, tangential chain roller conveyor 256
Modular belt conveyors, MBF-P 2040 120 RBT-P 2255, tangential chain roller conveyor,
Modular belt conveyors; application examples 146 curved section 259

424
RBT-P 2255, tangential chain roller SRF-P 2012; drive version BC 211
conveyor, straight section 258 SRF-P 2012; drive version BF 212
Recirculating ball bearing 25 388 SRF-P 2012; wear strips 213
Recirculating ball bearing 30 390 Stand versions and conveyor
Recirculating ball bearing guide KU 25.10 388 stand fastening elements 280
Recirculating ball bearing guide KU 30.10 390 Stand, heavy-duty 293
Recirculating ball bearing guides 384 Stand, KFG-P 2000 78
Reglomats 302 Stand, KFM-P 2040 128
Roller conveyors 244 Stand, KFS-P 2040.86 140
Roller conveyors; application examples 266 Stand, KGF-P 2040 83
Rollers 264 Stand, lightweight 285
Rotary table DTZ-P 2040 274 Stand, medium-weight 289
Rotary tables; application examples 276 Stand; conveyor stand fastening elements 280
SBF-EMMA, flat top chain conveyor 236 Stand; pad options 281
SBF-P 2254; drive version AC 228 Stand; version 31 293
SD – stopper damped chain conveyors 219 Stand; version 51.2 282
SD – stopper damped timing belt conveyors 175 Stand; version 52.5 284
Selecting a belt conveyor 20 Stand; version 53.1 286
Selecting a chain conveyor 184 Stand; version 53.11 287
Selecting a conveyor type 8 Stand; version 53.11, mobile 288
Selecting a drive 12 Stand; version 53.2 289
Selecting a linear guide 316 Stand; version 53.21 290
Selecting a modular belt conveyor 118 Stand; version 53.21, mobile 291
Selecting a roller conveyor 246 Stand; version 53.32 292
Selecting a timing belt conveyor 154 Stand; version 54.80 282
Side rail, KFG-P 2000 79 Stand; version 55.1 285
Side rails 294 Stands 280
Side rails, KFS-P 2040.86 141 Stopper; chain conveyor 218
Side rails; adjustable 295 Stopper; timing belt conveyor 174
Side rails; fixed 294 SU – stopper undamped chain conveyors 218
Side walls 92 SU – stopper undamped timing belt conveyors 174
Single stands 282 System solutions; application examples 408
SPU 2040; application examples 414 Tails, GUF-P 2000 49
SRF-P 2010, accumulating roller Tails, GUF-P 2004 68
chain conveyor 196 Tails, GUF-P 2041 60
SRF-P 2010; drive version AA 198 Tails, GUF-P 2045 35
SRF-P 2010; drive version AC 199 Tails, GUF-P MINI 30
SRF-P 2010; drive version AF 200 Tangential chain roller conveyor RBT-P 2255 256
SRF-P 2010; drive version AS 201 Tangential chain roller conveyor,
SRF-P 2010; drive version BC 202 curved section; RBT-P 2255 259
SRF-P 2010; drive version BF 203 Tangential chain roller conveyor,
SRF-P 2010; wear strips 204 straight section; RBT-P 2255 258
SRF-P 2012, accumulating roller Tensioning device and lubrication
chain conveyor 206 station KTF/SRF-P 2010 217
SRF-P 2012; drive version AA 208 Tensioning device for SRF-P 2012 217
SRF-P 2012; drive version AC 209 Timing belt conveyor ZRF-P 2010 160
SRF-P 2012; drive version AS 210 Timing belt conveyor ZRF-P 2040 156

425
Index – By Search Terms

Timing belt conveyor; accessories 172

Timing belt conveyor; application examples 176
Timing belt conveyor; pallets 172
Timing belt conveyors 152
Timing belts 170
TKU 2040; application examples 416
Track roller assemblies 332
Variant ECO KFG-P 2000 76
Versamove; application examples 410
Wear strips, KTF-P 2010 194
Wear strips, SRF-P 2010 204
Wear strips, SRF-P 2012 213
Wear strips, ZRF-P 2010 168
Wipers 351
ZRF-P 2010, timing belt conveyor 160
ZRF-P 2010; drive version AA 162
ZRF-P 2010; drive version AC 163
ZRF-P 2010; drive version AF 164
ZRF-P 2010; drive version AS 165
ZRF-P 2010; drive version BC 166
ZRF-P 2010; drive version BF 167
ZRF-P 2010; wear strips 168
ZRF-P 2040, timing belt conveyor 156
ZRF-P 2040; drive version AC 158
ZRF-P 2040; drive version AS 159

426
427
Index – Items By Item Number

16.00.0000 Initiator holder A 303 30.00.0038 Clamp, short 297

16.00.0001 Initiator holder A 303 30.00.0047 Clamp, left 297
16.00.0006 Initiator holder B 303 34.01.0001 Nut 1 M8 300
16.00.0007 Initiator holder B 303 34.01.0002 Nut 2/25 M8 300
16.00.0011 Initiator holder C 303 34.01.0006 Nut 3/50 M8 300
16.00.0012 Initiator holder C 303 34.01.0007 Nut 4/50 M8 300
16.00.0013 Initiator holder C 303 34.01.0011 Nut 2/35 M8 300
16.00.0026 Initiator holder E 303 34.01.0050 Nut 1 with spring steel sheet M8 300
16.00.0027 Initiator holder E 303 34.01.0051 Nut 1 with spring steel sheet M8 300
16.00.0028 Initiator holder E 303 34.02.0001 Nut 1 without chamfer M6 300
16.05.0011 Initiator holder A 303 34.02.0002 Nut 2/25 M6 300
21.07.0000 Wear strip mk 1040.07 137 34.02.0003 Nut 2/50 M6 300
21.12.0000 Wear strip mk 1040.12 157 34.02.0008 Nut 1 M6 300
21.13.0000 Wear strip mk 1040.13 157 34.02.0010 Nut 2/25 M6 300
21.14.0001 Lower wear strip 168/194/195 34.02.0050 Nut 1 with spring steel sheet M6 300
21.16.0000 Wear strip mk 1040.16 121 34.02.0051 Nut 1 with spring steel sheet M6 300
21.17.0000 Wear strip mk 1040.17 125/131 34.03.0002 Slot nut M8 300
22.05.2000 Wear strip mk 1005 85 34.04.0003 Slot nut M6 300
22.22.2000 Wear strip mk 1022 213 34.06.0002 T-nut M8 300
22.33.2000 Wear strip mk 1033 194 34.07.0002 T-nut M6 300
22.34.2000 Wear strip mk 1034 187/194 34.07.0003 T-nut M5 300
22.37.2000 Wear strip mk 1037 194 34.07.0004 T-nut M4 300
22.38.2000 Wear strip mk 1038 194 34.09.0003 Side walls for round rod 297
22.41.2000 Wear strip mk 1041 161/168 34.09.0004 Side walls for round rod 297
22.42.2000 Wear strip mk 1042 168 34.16.0431 Swivel-in nut 1 M4 300
22.44.0000 Wear strip mk 1044 229 34.16.0531 Swivel-in nut 1 M5 300
22.44.2000 Wear strip SBF-P 2254 233 34.16.0537 Swivel-in nut 1 M5 300
22.45.0000 Wear strip mk 1045 229 34.16.0631 Swivel-in nut 1 M6 300
22.45.2000 Wear strip SBF-P 2254 233 34.16.0637 Swivel-in nut 1 M6 300
22.47.2000 Wear strip mk 1047 197/204 34.16.0831 Swivel-in nut 1 M8 300
22.48.2000 Wear strip mk 1048 197/204 34.16.0834 Swivel-in nut 2/40 M8 300
22.50.2000 Wear strip mk 1050 207/213 34.16.0835 Swivel-in nut 3/25 M8 300
22.89.2000 Wear strip mk 1089 207/213 34.16.0837 Swivel-in nut 1 M8 300
23.11.2000 Wear strip mk 1111 195 38.07. .... Clamping profile mk 2038.07 346
23.12.2000 Wear strip mk 1112 204 38.12. .... Clamping profile mk 2038.12 347
25.01. .... Mounting profile mk 2025.01 339 38.20. .... Clamping profile mk 2038.20 346
25.02. .... Mounting profile mk 2025.02 339 38.21. .... Clamping profile mk 2038.21 346
25.03. .... Mounting profile mk 2025.03 339 38.30. .... Clamping profile mk 2038.30 346
25.04. .... Mounting profile mk 2025.04 339 38.31. .... Clamping profile mk 2038.31 346
25.05. .... Mounting profile mk 2025.05 339 38.32. .... Clamping profile mk 2038.32 346
25.75.2000 Wear strip mk 1025.75 261 38.33. .... Clamping profile mk 2038.33 346
30.00.0001 Clamp 297 38.36. .... Clamping profile mk 2038.36 347
30.00.0002 Clamp 297 38.41. .... Clamping profile mk 2038.41 347
30.00.0013 Clamp, right 297 38.44. ... Clamping profile mk 2038.44 347
30.00.0017 Clamp 297 38.46. .... Clamping profile mk 2038.46 347
30.00.0023 Swivel clamp 298 38.50. .... Clamping profile mk 2038.50 348
30.00.0024 Swivel clamp 298 38.55. .... Clamping profile mk 2038.55 348

428
38.56. .... Clamping profile mk 2038.56 348 60.02. .... Mounting profile mk 2060.02 345
38.60. .... Clamping profile mk 2038.60 348 60.03. .... Mounting profile mk 2060.03 345
38.61. .... Clamping profile mk 2038.61 348 60.04. .... Mounting profile mk 2060.04 345
38.75. .... Clamping profile mk 2038.75 347 60.05. .... Mounting profile mk 2060.05 345
38.77. .... Clamping profile mk 2038.77 347 60.07. .... Mounting profile mk 2060.07 345
45.41. .... Profile mk 2045.41 33/121/125 63.00.0016 Washer, ø 30 298
50.02.0023 Base plate 1 283 7000AA.... Rod, ø 12 299
50.02.0089 Base plate 7 283 7000AD.... Rod, ø 12 299
51.00. .... Mounting profile mk 2000 343 7000AF.... Guide rod, ø 12 299
51.00. .... Profile mk 2000 37/71/85 7000CA.... Guide rod, ø 12 299
51.01. .... Profile mk 2001 85 7000CC.... Guide rod, ø 12 299
51.04. .... Mounting profile mk 2004 343 7000DB.... Guide rod, ø 12 299
51.04. .... Profile mk 2004 63 7003AA.... Guide rod Cf 53 351
51.05. .... Mounting profile mk 2005 343 7003AK.... Guide rod Cf 53 351
51.06. .... Mounting profile mk 2006 343 7003AM.... Guide rod Cf 53 351
51.08. .... Mounting profile mk 2008 343 7003CM.... Guide rod Cf 53 351
51.09. .... Mounting profile mk 2009 343 7003DC.... Guide rod, galvan. Cf 53 351
51.10. .... Profile mk 2010 161/187/197 7003DH.... Guide rod, galvan. Cf 53 351
51.11. .... Mounting profile mk 2011 343 7003DP.... Guide rod, galvan. Cf 53 351
51.12. .... Profile mk 2012 207 7003DT.... Guide rod, galvan. Cf 53 351
51.23. .... Mounting profile mk 2023 343 7003EC.... Guide rod X46 Cr13 351
51.65. .... Profile mk 2065 249 7003EH.... Guide rod X46 Cr13 351
51.66. .... Profile mk 2066 249 7003EP.... Guide rod X46 Cr13 351
51.75. .... Profile mk 2075 23 7003ET.... Guide rod X46 Cr13 351
51.76. .... Profile mk 2100 23 B01.00.409 SBF-P 2254 drive AC 231
51.77. .... Profile mk 2150 23 B01.00.410 SBF-P 2254 drive AC 231
52.51. .... Profile mk 2251 53 B02.99.151 Earth terminal 300
52.54. .... Profile mk 2254 229 B03.00.003 Wiper ø 10 351
52.55. .... Profile mk 2255 257/261 B03.00.004 Wiper ø 16 351
54.01. .... Mounting profile mk 2040.01 341 B03.00.011 Felt wiper system 2015 322
54.01. .... Profile mk 2040.01 71/81 B03.00.012 Felt wiper system 2011 322
54.02. .... Mounting profile mk 2040.02 341 B03.00.013 Wiper ø 20 351
54.02. .... Profile mk 2040.02 229 B03.00.014 Wiper ø 6 351
54.03. .... Mounting profile mk 2040.03 341 B08.00.409 SBF-P 2254 section 231
54.03. .... Profile mk 2040.03 157 B08.00.410 SBF-P 2254 section 231
54.05. .... Mounting profile mk 2040.05 341 B16.08.000 Reglomat 180DC-3A 302
54.06. .... Mounting profile mk 2040.06 341 B16.08.001 Reglomat 180DC-3ARV 302
54.07. .... Mounting profile mk 2040.07 341 B16.08.100 Reglomat 230AC-250 302
54.08. .... Mounting profile mk 2040.08 341 B16.08.101 Reglomat 230AC-250RV 302
54.10. .... Mounting profile mk 2040.10 341 B16.08.102 Reglomat 230AC-370 302
54.21. .... Profile mk 2040.21 81 B16.08.103 Reglomat 230AC-370RV 302
54.40. .... Profile mk 2040.40 257 B16.08.104 Reglomat 230AC-550 302
54.73. .... Mounting profile mk 2040.73 341 B16.08.105 Reglomat 230AC-550RV 302
54.80. .... Profile mk 2040.80 131 B16.08.106 Reglomat 230AC-750 302
54.85. .... Profile mk 2040.85 257/261 B16.08.107 Reglomat 230AC-750RV 302
54.86. .... Profile mk 2040.86 137 B17.00.003 Side rail SF1.3 294
60.01. .... Mounting profile mk 2060.01 345 B17.00.004 Side rail SF2.1 294

429
Index – Items By Item Number

B17.00.005 Side rail SF2.2 294 B20.10.568 SRF-P 2012 AS 201

B17.00.020 Side rail SF10.1, straight section 296 B20.10.571 SRF-P 2012 BC 202
B17.00.021 Side rail SF10.2, curved section 296 B20.10.572 SRF-P 2012 BF 203
B17.00.026 Side rail SF 8.1 141 B20.11.701 DGF-P 2001 AC belt 86
B17.00.035 Side rail KFG-P 2000 79 B20.12.007 SRF-P 2012 AC 209
B17.00.101 Side rail SF01 295 B20.12.008 SRF-P 2012 AA 208
B17.00.102 Side rail SF02 295 B20.12.009 SRF-P 2012 AS 210
B17.00.103 Side rail SF03 295 B20.12.010 SRF-P 2012 BC 211
B17.01.010 Side rail strip type 21 295 B20.12.011 SRF-P 2012 BF 212
B17.01.013 Side rail strip type 01 295 B20.14.001 GUF-P 2004 AC 65
B17.01.014 Side rail strip type 22 295 B20.14.002 GUF-P 2004 AS 67
B17.01.015 Side rail strip type 23 295 B20.14.003 GUF-P 2004 AM 66
B17.01.016 Side rail strip type 24 295 B20.14.009 GUF-P 2004 AA 64
B17.01.017 Side rail strip type 11 295 B20.40.001 GUF-P 2041 AC 55
B17.01.018 Side rail strip type 12 295 B20.40.003 GUF-P 2041 AS 57
B20.00.001 GUF-P 2000 BA 45 B20.40.004 GUF-P 2041 BC 58
B20.00.002 GUF-P 2000 AC 39 B20.40.005 GUF-P 2041 CA 59
B20.00.003 GUF-P 2000 AM 42 B20.40.008 GUF-P 2041 AF 56
B20.00.004 GUF-P 2000 BC 46 B20.40.009 GUF-P 2041 AA 54
B20.00.005 GUF-P 2000 AG 41 B20.40.020 KGF-P 2040 BC, 90° curve 82
B20.00.008 GUF-P 2000 AS 43 B20.40.021 KGF-P 2040 BC, 180° curve 82
B20.00.009 GUF-P 2000 AA 38 B20.40.301 ZRF-P 2040 AC 158
B20.00.010 KFG-P 2000 AC 72 B20.40.302 ZRF-P 2040 AS 159
B20.00.010 KFG-P 2000 AF 73 B20.40.605 KFS-P 2040.86 AC, type G 138
B20.00.010 KFG-P 2000 AS 74 B20.40.605 Stand KFS-P 2040.86 AC, type G 140
B20.00.010 KFG-P 2000 AU 75 B20.40.606 KFS-P 2040.86 AC, type S 138
B20.00.011 GUF-P 2000 AF 40 B20.40.606 Stand KFS-P 2040.86 AC, type S 140
B20.00.012 GUF-P 2000 BF 47 B20.40.607 KFS-P 2040.86 AC type K 138
B20.00.015 KFG-P 2000 ECO 76 B20.40.607 Stand KFS-P 2040.86 AC, type K 140
B20.00.020 GUF-P 2000 AU 44 B20.40.608 KFS-P 2040.86 AC, type L 138
B20.00.025 GUF-P 2000 CA 48 B20.40.608 Stand KFS-P 2040.86 AC, type L 140
B20.10.350 ZRF-P 2010 AA 162 B20.40.609 KFS-P 2040.86 AS, type G 139
B20.10.351 ZRF-P 2010 AC 163 B20.40.609 Stand KFS-P 2040.86 AS, type G 140
B20.10.355 ZRF-P 2010 AS 165 B20.40.610 KFS-P 2040.86 AS, type S 139
B20.10.356 ZRF-P 2010 BC 166 B20.40.610 Stand KFS-P 2040.86 AS, type S 140
B20.10.357 ZRF-P 2010 AF 164 B20.40.611 KFS-P 2040.86 AS, type K 139
B20.10.359 ZRF-P 2010 BF 167 B20.40.611 Stand KFS-P 2040.86 AS, type K 140
B20.10.359.600 Wear strip mk 1110 168 B20.40.612 KFS-P 2040.86 AS, type L 139
B20.10.465 KTF-P 2010 AA 188 B20.40.612 Stand KFS-P 2040.86 AS, type L 140
B20.10.466 KTF-P 2010 AC 189 B20.40.806 MBF-P 2040 AC 122
B20.10.467 KTF-P 2010 AF 190 B20.40.807 MBF-P 2040 AS 123
B20.10.468 KTF-P 2010 AS 191 B20.40.810 KFM-P 2040 AC type S 126
B20.10.471 KTF-P 2010 BC 192 B20.40.811 KFM-P 2040 AC type K 126
B20.10.472 KTF-P 2010 BF 193 B20.40.812 KFM-P 2040 AC type L 126
B20.10.565 SRF-P 2012 AA 198 B20.40.813 KFM-P 2040 AS type S 127
B20.10.566 SRF-P 2012 AC 199 B20.40.814 KFM-P 2040 AS type K 127
B20.10.567 SRF-P 2010 AF 200 B20.40.815 KFM-P 2040 AS type L 127

430
B20.40.820 KMF-P 2040 AS type L 134 B46.02.004 Swivel clamp, complete 298
B20.40.821 KMF-P 2040 AS type S 134 B46.02.005 Swivel clamp, complete 298
B20.40.822 KMF-P 2040 AS type U 134 B46.07.020 Connecting kit 322
B20.40.823 KMF-P 2040 AF type L 134 B46.07.021 Connecting kit 322
B20.40.824 KMF-P 2040 AF type S 134 B46.10.001 Drive control for rollers, type 66 265
B20.40.825 KMF-P 2040 AF type U 134 B46.10.002 Drive control for rollers, type 67 265
B20.40.826 KMF-P 2040 AC type L 134 B51.04.004 Profile guide PF 1638.44 370
B20.40.827 KMF-P 2040 AC type S 134 B51.04.015 Profile guide PF 1038.41/60 368
B20.40.828 KMF-P 2040 AC type U 134 B51.04.016 Profile guide PF 1638.44/61 370
B20.45.001 GUF-P 2045 CA 34 B51.04.020 Profile guide PF 1038.41 368
B20.75.001 GUF-P MINI AC 25 B51.04.025 Profile guide PF 638.20 352
B20.75.004 GUF-P MINI AG 27 B51.04.029 Profile guide PF 638.20/50 352
B20.75.005 GUF-P MINI BC 29 B51.04.030 Profile guide PF 638.21 354
B20.75.009 GUF-P MINI AA 24 B51.04.042 Profile guide PF 638.30 356
B20.75.030 GUF-P MINI BA 28 B51.04.043 Profile guide PF 638.30/55 356
B20.75.033 GUF-P MINI AD 26 B51.04.046 Profile guide PF 1038.31 358
B36.00.414 SBF-P 2254, sliding curve 232 B51.04.047 Profile guide PF 1038.31/55 358
B36.00.415 SBF-P 2254, sliding curve 232 B51.04.048 Profile guide PF 1038.32 360
B36.00.416 SBF-P 2254, sliding curve 232 B51.04.049 Profile guide PF 1038.32/56 360
B36.00.417 SBF-P 2254, sliding curve 232 B51.04.052 Profile guide PF 1638.33 362
B36.00.428 SBF-P 2254, rolling curve, 90° 232 B51.04.053 Profile guide PF 1638.33/56 362
B36.00.429 SBF-P 2254, rolling curve, 90° 232 B51.04.109 Profile guide PF 1638.36 372
B36.00.430 SBF-P 2254, rolling curve, 180° 232 B51.04.140 Profile guide PF 638.75 364
B36.00.431 SBF-P 2254, rolling curve, 180° 232 B51.04.142 Profile guide PF 1038.77 366
B36.00.434 SBF-P 2254, vertical incline 233 B51.04.404 Track, KU 25.10 388
B36.00.435 SBF-P 2254, vertical incline 233 B51.04.406 Track, KU 30.10 390
B36.00.436 SBF-P 2254, vertical incline 233 B60.02.011 Guide roller, centric 350
B36.00.438 SBF-P 2254, vertical incline 233 B60.02.012 Guide roller, eccentric 350
B36.00.439 SBF-P 2254, vertical incline 233 B60.02.013 Guide roller, centric 350
B36.00.440 SBF-P 2254, vertical incline 233 B60.02.014 Guide roller, eccentric 350
B37.00.002 SBF-P 2254, transfer segment 233 B60.02.015 Guide roller, centric 350
B37.00.003 SBF-P 2254, transfer segment 233 B60.02.016 Guide roller, eccentric 350
B38.02.003 LZR 2000-38.41-15 L1 150 376 B60.02.017 Guide roller, centric 350
B38.02.003 LZR 2000-38.41-15 L1 250 376 B60.02.018 Guide roller, eccentric 350
B38.02.004 LZR 2004-38.41-30 L1 150 378 B61.00.001 RBS-P 2065/2066 ø 20 250
B38.02.004 LZR 2004-38.41-30 L1 250 378 B61.00.002 RBS-P 2065/2066 ø 40 250
B38.02.005 LZR 2004-38.41-30 L1 250 379 B61.00.003 RBS-P 2065/2066 ø 50 250
B38.02.005 LZR 2004-38.41-30 L1 450 379 B61.00.004 RBS-P 2066 251
B38.02.006 LZR 2005-38.44-30 L1 250 380 B61.02.001 RBS-P 2255 254
B38.02.006 LZR 2005-38.44-30 L1 450 380 B61.02.002 RBS-P 2255 255
B38.02.007 LZR 2000-38.41-15 L1 250 377 B61.02.003 RBT-P 2255 258
B38.02.009 LZR 2005-38.44-30 L1 250 381 B61.02.004 RBT-P 2255 259
B38.02.009 LZR 2005-38.44-30 L1 450 381 B61.02.005 RBM-P 2255 262
B38.02.010 LZR 2011-38.44-30 L1 250 383 B61.02.006 RBM-P 2255 263
B38.02.010 LZR 2011-38.44-30 L1 450 383 B66.00.003 End stop RBS-P 2065/66 304
B38.02.011 LZR 2011-38.44-30 L1 250 382 B66.00.004 End stop GUF-P 2000 304
B38.02.011 LZR 2011-38.44-30 L1 450 382 B67.03.002 Stand 31 293

431
Index – Items By Item Number

B67.04.002 Stand 51.2 282 B85.00.122 Adjusting unit VST 2011-D-2 ø 100 330
B67.04.080 Stand 54.80 282 B85.00.125 Adjusting unit VST 2011-H-2 ø 125 330
B67.05.008 Stand 52.5 284 B85.00.126 Adjusting unit VST 2011-S-2 ø 125 330
B67.06.001 Stand 53.1 286 B85.00.127 Adjusting unit VST 2011-D-2 ø 125 330
B67.06.002 Stand 53.11 287 B85.00.215 Adjusting unit VST 2015-H-G 327
B67.06.003 Stand 53.2 289 B85.00.216 Adjusting unit VST 2015-S-G 327
B67.06.004 Stand 53.21 290 B85.00.217 Adjusting unit VST 2015-D-G 327
B67.06.011 Stand 55.1 285 B85.00.220 Adjusting unit VST 2011-H-G ø 100 331
B67.06.014 Stand, incline conveyor 78/128 B85.00.221 Adjusting unit VST 2011-S-G ø 100 331
B67.06.015 Stand, incline conveyor 78/128 B85.00.222 Adjusting unit VST 2011-D-G ø 100 331
B67.06.016 Stand 53.32 292 B85.00.225 Adjusting unit VST 2011-H-G ø 125 331
B67.06.100 Stand 53.11, mobile 288 B85.00.226 Adjusting unit VST 2011-S-G ø 125 331
B67.06.101 Stand 53.21, mobile 291 B85.00.227 Adjusting unit VST 2011-D-G ø 125 331
B80.00.001 Tail 01, GUF-P 2000 49 B90.25.041 Roller carriage LW 38.2004 L1 75 353
B80.00.002 Tail 17, GUF-P 2000 51 B90.25.041 Roller carriage LW 38.2004 L1 100 353
B80.00.005 Tail 09, GUF-P 2000 49 B90.25.042 Roller carriage LW 38.2104 L1 100 355
B80.00.006 Tail 19, GUF-P 2000 50 B90.25.042 Roller carriage LW 38.2104 L1 150 355
B80.00.007 Tail 11, GUF-P 2000 49 B90.40.041 Roller carriage LW 38.3004 L1 100 357
B80.00.017 Tail 10, GUF-P 2000 51 B90.40.041 Roller carriage LW 38.3004 L1 160 357
B80.00.018 Tail 13, GUF-P 2000 50 B90.40.042 Roller carriage LW 38.3104 L1 140 359
B80.00.409 SBF-P 2254 tail 231 B90.40.042 Roller carriage LW 38.3104 L1 240 359
B80.00.410 SBF-P 2254 tail 231 B90.40.043 Roller carriage LW 38.3204 L1 180 361
B80.01.001 Tail 03, GUF-P MINI 30 B90.40.043 Roller carriage LW 38.3204 L1 280 361
B80.01.004 Tail 19, GUF-P MINI 31 B90.40.044 Roller carriage LW 38.3304 L1 240 363
B80.01.006 Tail 01, GUF-P MINI 30 B90.40.044 Roller carriage LW 38.3304 L1 400 363
B80.01.007 Tail 11, GUF-P MINI 31 B90.40.441 Roller carriage LW 38.7544 L1 120 365
B80.02.004 Tail 01, GUF-P 2004 68 B90.40.443 Roller carriage LW 38.7744 L1 160 367
B80.02.005 Tail 09, GUF-P 2004 68 B90.50.042 Roller carriage LW 38.4104 L1 150 369
B80.07.001 Tail 01, GUF-P 2041 60 B90.50.042 Roller carriage LW 38.4104 L1 250 369
B80.07.002 Tail 19, GUF-P 2041 61 B90.50.044 Roller carriage LW 38.4404 L1 250 371
B80.07.009 Tail 02, GUF-P 2041 60 B90.50.044 Roller carriage LW 38.4404 L1 450 371
B80.07.010 Tail 13, GUF-P 2041 61 B90.60.042 Roller carriage LW 38.3604 L1 280 373
B80.45.001 Tail 01, GUF-P 2045 35 B90.60.042 Roller carriage LW 38.3604 L1 480 373
B85.00.015 Adjusting unit VST 2015-H 325 K101100001 Track roller assembly LR 10 337
B85.00.016 Adjusting unit VST 2015-S 325 K101100002 Track roller assembly LR 16 337
B85.00.017 Adjusting unit VST 2015-D 325 K101100003 Track roller assembly LR 6 337
B85.00.020 Adjusting unit VST 2011-H ø 100 329 K101100006 Track roller assembly LR 20 337
B85.00.021 Adjusting unit VST 2011-S ø 100 329 K10230/12 Closure strip 168/194/195
B85.00.022 Adjusting unit VST 2011-D ø 100 329 K1029001 Belt GU-U0302-001WE 90
B85.00.025 Adjusting unit VST 2011-H ø 125 329 K1029003 Belt GU-T0105-003BL 89
B85.00.026 Adjusting unit VST 2011-S ø 125 329 K1029004 Belt GU-U0305-004WE 90
B85.00.027 Adjusting unit VST 2011-D ø 125 329 K1029005 Belt GU-R0303-005DG 91
B85.00.115 Adjusting unit VST 2015-H-2 326 K1029006 Belt GU-V0203-006DG 90
B85.00.116 Adjusting unit VST 2015-S-2 326 K1029007 Belt GU-U0204-007WE 89
B85.00.117 Adjusting unit VST 2015-D-2 326 K1029008 Belt GU-T0101-008BL 89
B85.00.120 Adjusting unit VST 2011-H-2 ø 100 330 K1029009 Belt GU-V0303-009DG 91
B85.00.121 Adjusting unit VST 2011-S-2 ø 100 330 K1029010 Belt GU-V0103-010SW 89

432
K1029011 Belt GU-U0205-011DG 90 K11423 Accumulating roller chain 215
K1029012 Belt GU-U0306-012DG 91 K11424 Accumulating roller chain 215
K1029013 Belt GU-V0307-013DG 91 K11425 Accumulating roller chain 215
K1029014 Belt GU-V0306-014DG 91 K11435 Accumulating roller chain 215
K1029015 Belt GU-U0107-015DG 89 K114510022 Chain, steel 234
K1029016 Belt GU-U0305-016DG 91 K114510030 Chain, plastic 234
K1029017 Belt GU-U0306-017WE 90 K114510031 Chain, plastic 234
K1029018 Belt GU-V0307-018SW 91 K114510044 Chain, plastic 234
K1029019 Belt GU-F0106-019SW 89 K114510047 Chain, steel 234
K1029024 Belt GU-U0305-024LB 90 K114510048 Chain, plastic 234
K1029028 Belt GU-V0106-028DG 89 K114510062 Chain, steel 234
K1029029 Belt GU-U0210-029DG 90 K114510063 Chain, steel 234
K1029030 Belt GU-U0308-030LB 90 K114510085 Chain, plastic 234
K1029050 Belt GU-U0205-050LB 89 K114510090 Chain, plastic 234
K106043 Roller type 43 264 K114510091 Chain, plastic 234
K106044 Roller type 44 264 K114510094 Chain, plastic 234
K106045 Roll type 45 264 K11455 Modular belt S10 142
K106046 Roller type 46 264 K11455 Modular belt S8 142
K106047 Roller type 47 264 K11455 Modular belt ASB 2.2 144
K106048 Roller type 48 264 K116041025 Track, KU 25.10 388
K106049 Roller type 49 264 K116041030 Track, KU 30.10 390
K106050 Roller type 50 264 K116041125 Guide carriage KU 25.11 389
K106051 Roller type 51 265 K116041130 Guide carriage KU 30.11 391
K106052 Roller type 52 265 K116041325 Guide carriage KU 25.13 389
K106055 Roller type 55 265 K116041330 Guide carriage KU 30.13 391
K106056 Roller type 56 265 K307000002 Sensor cable 303
K106057 Roller type 57 264 K307000017 Sensor cable 303
K106058 Roller type 58 264 K307000018 Sensor cable 303
K106059 Roller type 59 264 K308000009 Inductive sensor 303
K106060 Roller type 60 264 K308000010 Inductive sensor 303
K106061 Roller type 61 264 K309000052 Clamp mount 303
K106066 Roller type 66 265 K309000053 Clamp mount 303
K106066VK54 Extension cable 265 K309000124 Inductive sensor 303
K106067 Roller type 67 265 K503011401 Stopper SU 400 174/218
K110030061 Clamping lever 322 K503011402 Stopper SU 400 174/218
K11402 Single roller chain 214 K503011404 Stopper SU 400 174/218
K114020001 Locking link 214 K503011405 Stopper SU 400 174/218
K11406 Accumulating roller chain 214 K503011406 Stopper SU 400 174/218
K114060001 Locking link 214 K503012401 Stopper SU 400 174/218
K11407 Accumulating roller chain 215 K503012404 Stopper SU 400 174/218
K11415 Accumulating roller chain 215 K503012405 Stopper SU 400 174/218
K11418 Accumulating roller chain 215 K503021061 Stopper SD 60 175/219
K114180001 Locking link 215 K503021063 Stopper SD 60 175/219
K11420 Accumulating roller chain 215 K503021064 Stopper SD 60 175/219
K11420 Accumulating roller chain 215 K503021101 Stopper SD 100 175/219
K11421 Accumulating roller chain 215 K503021102 Stopper SD 100 175/219
K11422 Accumulating roller chain 215 K503022061 Stopper SD 60 175/219

433
Index – Items By Item Number

K503022063 Stopper SD 60 175/219

K503022064 Stopper SD 60 175/219
K503022101 Stopper SD 100 175/219
K503022102 Stopper SD 100 175/219
mk 2522 Swivel clamp 298

434
 Copyright © 2019 Maschinenbau Kitz GmbH
Edition 4.0
Printed 01/2019

All rights reserved. Technical information subject to change without notice. Reproduction,
whether in full or in part, requires the written consent of Maschinenbau Kitz GmbH. This also applies for
use in digital media and systems. The place of jurisdiction shall be Siegburg, Germany.

435
Maschinenbau Kitz GmbH
Headquarters of the
mk Technology Group
Ampèrestrasse 18
53844 Troisdorf
Germany
Tel. +49 228 4598-0
[email protected]

www.mk-group.com
Edition 4.0